9373 lines
363 KiB
Plaintext
9373 lines
363 KiB
Plaintext
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACCESS_TOKEN ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage Access Tokens.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACCESS_TOKEN ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create
|
|||
|
- ^list
|
|||
|
- ^reveal
|
|||
|
- ^revoke
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACCESS_TOKEN ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^create "To be used by the Build Server"
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^list
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^reveal 19c57d0f-c525-4767-8670-82f7ecc2ccdb
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^revoke 19c57d0f-c525-4767-8670-82f7ecc2ccdb
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACCESS_TOKEN_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new access token.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACCESS_TOKEN_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^create <description> [<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>] [--dateformat=<str_date_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
description A description that helps identify the purpose
|
|||
|
of the access token.
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACCESS_TOKEN_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The access token lifespan will be determined by the server configuration.
|
|||
|
It is not possible to set the token lifespan at creation time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^id} | {0} ID of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^description} | {1} Description of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^owner} | {2} Owner of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^creationdate} | {3} Creation date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^expirationdate} | {4} Expiration date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^lastusedate} | {5} Last use date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the format parameter is not specified, the output will be printed
|
|||
|
using a table format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^create "Token for Build Server"
|
|||
|
(Creates a new access token with the provided description against the default
|
|||
|
repserver.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^create "Token for Build Server" skull:8087
|
|||
|
(Creates a new access token with the provided description on repserver skull:8087.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^create "Token for Build Server" --^format="{^id}"
|
|||
|
(Creates a new access token with the provided description against the default
|
|||
|
repserver and only displays its ID.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACCESS_TOKEN_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists access tokens.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACCESS_TOKEN_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^list [<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACCESS_TOKEN_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can only list your own access tokens. Revoked access tokens will not be
|
|||
|
returned as part of the result. On the other hand, expired access tokens will.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^id} | {0} ID of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^description} | {1} Description of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^owner} | {2} Owner of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^creationdate} | {3} Creation date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^expirationdate} | {4} Expiration date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^lastusedate} | {5} Last use date of the access token.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the format parameter is not specified, the output will be printed
|
|||
|
using a table format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^list
|
|||
|
(Lists access tokens on the default repserver.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^list skull:8087
|
|||
|
(Lists access tokens on repserver skull:8087.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^list --^format="{^id}"
|
|||
|
(Lists access tokens on the default repserver and only displays their IDs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVOKE ==
|
|||
|
Revokes an existing access token.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVOKE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^revoke <id> [<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
id The ID of the access token to be revoked.
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVOKE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can only revoke your own access tokens. Trying to revoke an access token
|
|||
|
that does not exist or does not belong to you will result in an error.
|
|||
|
(See '^cm ^accesstoken ^list --^help' for further information.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To revoke an access token you need to provide the full ID.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Revoking an access token does not mean that the already revealed Unity VCS
|
|||
|
tokens will stop functioning immediately.
|
|||
|
The maximum amount of time that can pass between revoking an access token
|
|||
|
and the revealed Unity VCS token stopping working depends on the
|
|||
|
'TokenExpirationTimeSpan' configuration key in your server.conf.
|
|||
|
By default, it is 1 hour.
|
|||
|
If you need to know the exact value configured for your Unity VCS server,
|
|||
|
please contact your repository server administrator.
|
|||
|
(See '^cm ^accesstoken ^reveal --^help' for further information.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^revoke de0be8a4-2a7a-44c6-9c4c-82c8222dbc6f
|
|||
|
(Revokes the access token with the provided ID from the default repserver.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^revoke de0be8a4-2a7a-44c6-9c4c-82c8222dbc6f skull:8087
|
|||
|
(Revokes the access token with the provided ID from repserver skull:8087.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVEAL ==
|
|||
|
Reveals an access token so it can be used as the authentication credentials.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVEAL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^reveal <id> [<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
id The ID of the access token to be revealed.
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACCESS_TOKEN_REVEAL ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can only reveal your own access tokens. Trying to reveal an access token
|
|||
|
that does not exist or does not belong to you will result in an error.
|
|||
|
(See '^cm ^accesstoken ^list --^help' for further information.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To reveal an access token you need to provide the full ID.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The revealed token can be used for automation purposes. You can pass it down
|
|||
|
in subsequent 'cm' commands (either in the same machine or a different one)
|
|||
|
by using the following 'cm' arguments (replace accordingly):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
$ cm ^repo ^list \
|
|||
|
--^username=^Peter \
|
|||
|
--^workingmode=^OIDCWorkingMode \
|
|||
|
--^token="the revealed token" \
|
|||
|
--^server=skull:8087
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The revealed token will be valid from the very moment it was revealed, and
|
|||
|
will be automatically renewed as long as the related access token is not
|
|||
|
expired nor revoked.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^reveal d2f43753-f612-4e51-b9b4-3c2883d7cf95
|
|||
|
(Reveals the access token with the provided ID on the default repserver.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^accesstoken ^reveal d2f43753-f612-4e51-b9b4-3c2883d7cf95 skull:8087
|
|||
|
(Reveals the access token with the provided ID on repserver skull:8087.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACL ==
|
|||
|
Sets permissions on an object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl (--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
|
|||
|
(-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]
|
|||
|
<objectspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
--^user User name.
|
|||
|
--^group Group name.
|
|||
|
-^allowed Enables the specified permission or permissions. Use a
|
|||
|
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
|||
|
to display all the available permissions.)
|
|||
|
-^denied Denies the specified permission or permission. Use a
|
|||
|
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
|||
|
to display all the available permissions.)
|
|||
|
-^overrideallowed Overrides the allowed permission or permissions. Use a
|
|||
|
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
|||
|
to display all the available permissions.)
|
|||
|
-^overridedenied Overrides the denied permission or permissions. Use a
|
|||
|
comma to separate permissions. (Use 'cm ^showpermissions'
|
|||
|
to display all the available permissions.)
|
|||
|
objectspec The object whose permissions will be set.
|
|||
|
The valid objects for this command are:
|
|||
|
repserver, repository, branch, label, and attribute.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Special usage for secured paths:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl [(--^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group_name>)
|
|||
|
(-^allowed|-^denied|-^overrideallowed|-^overridedenied=+|-<permission>[,...])[,...]]
|
|||
|
[--^delete] [--^branches=[+ | -]<branch>[,...]]
|
|||
|
<spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^delete Removes a secured path.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^branches Sets the secured path permissions to a group of branches.
|
|||
|
Use a comma to separate branches.
|
|||
|
Optionally, each branch can be preceded by the + or -
|
|||
|
sign to specify whether a branch must be added or deleted
|
|||
|
to the list when editing.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
spec The secured path where to set the permissions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACL ==
|
|||
|
Configuring permissions requires understanding how Unity VCS security works.
|
|||
|
Check the Security Guide to learn how permissions work:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/securityguide
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command sets permissions for a user or group on the specified objects,
|
|||
|
repositories, branches, labels and/or server paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Object specs:
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify objects.)
|
|||
|
The '^acl' command uses a special type of spec: secured paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Secured paths specs: ^path:server_path[#tag]
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
- ^path:/src/foo.c
|
|||
|
- ^path:/doc/pdf
|
|||
|
- ^path:/doc/pdf#documents
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Permission action:
|
|||
|
Use -^allowed and -^denied to specify what permissions to set.
|
|||
|
Use -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied arguments to specify what
|
|||
|
permissions to override.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Each action requires a permission list separated by commas.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Permission names:
|
|||
|
Each permission name is preceded by + or - symbol.
|
|||
|
The + symbol sets the permission and the - symbol clears it.
|
|||
|
To see the permissions of an object, use the 'cm ^showacl' command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Overridden permissions:
|
|||
|
Overriding a permission using -^overrideallowed and -^overridedenied
|
|||
|
allows you to bypass inheritance.
|
|||
|
It is helpful to bypass permissions set at the repository or server
|
|||
|
level.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=vio -^allowed=+^ci -^overrideallowed=+^ci ^br:qa@test
|
|||
|
(Allows user 'vio' to checkin on the branch 'qa' on repo 'test'
|
|||
|
even if she has the permission denied at the repo level.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Server path permissions (a.k.a. secured paths):
|
|||
|
- It is possible to specify permissions for a given server path.
|
|||
|
- These permissions are checked during the checkin operation.
|
|||
|
- These permissions can also be checked during the update operation,
|
|||
|
and can be used as a way to prevent certain directories and files to
|
|||
|
be downloaded to the workspace.
|
|||
|
- For every item to checkin, the server tries to match the item path
|
|||
|
with a secured path. If it matches, the checkin operation checks
|
|||
|
whether the item has permissions to be checked in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The permissions that can be defined for a secured path are the
|
|||
|
following:
|
|||
|
'^ci', '^change', '^add', '^move', '^rm', '^read'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the permissions check is not successful for any of the involved
|
|||
|
items, the checkin operation will be rolled back.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To set secured path permissions to a group of branches, use the
|
|||
|
--^branches option.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^ci ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=main,main/rel0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To edit the ACL associated to the secured path, the tag is useful.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=jo -^denied=+^rm ^path:/src#rule0
|
|||
|
(Without the tag, the list of branches would need to be specified
|
|||
|
again.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The list of branches of the secured path can be edited.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl ^path:/src#rule0 --^branches=-main,+main/rel1
|
|||
|
(Removes 'main' from the list and adds 'main/rel1'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To remove a secured path, use the --^delete argument.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=jo --^delete ^path:/src#rule0
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Inheritance:
|
|||
|
Inheritance is an option that comes from the days of Plastic SCM 3.0.
|
|||
|
It is advanced, but almost deprecated.
|
|||
|
It lets an object inherit its permissions from any other object,
|
|||
|
overriding the default inheritance relationships.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use the option -^cut to cut the inheritance chain.
|
|||
|
Use the option -^cutncpy to cut and copy the current inherited
|
|||
|
permissions. (This is inspired on the Windows filesystem permissions
|
|||
|
where you can cut inheritance but retain the actual permissions.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The -^inherit option allows the user to inherit from an object spec.
|
|||
|
Example: '-^inherit=object_spec'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=danipen -^denied=+^ci ^rep:core
|
|||
|
(Denies checkin for user 'danipen' on repo 'core'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^group=developers -^allowed=+^view,-^read -^denied=+^chgperm ^br:main
|
|||
|
(The command grants view permission, clears read permission,
|
|||
|
and denies chgperm permission to 'developers' group in 'main' branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Secured path examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^group=devs -^denied=+^ci ^path:/server#rel --^branches=main,main/2.0
|
|||
|
(The command denies the checkin permission to 'devs' group for any path
|
|||
|
that matches '/server' in the branches 'main' and 'main/2.0'. The tag '#rel'
|
|||
|
is created to be able to refer to it later.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl ^path:/server#rel --^branches=-/main,+/main/Rel2.1
|
|||
|
(Updates the secured path '/server' whose tag is 'rel', removing the
|
|||
|
'main' branch and adding the branch 'main/Rel2.1' to the branch
|
|||
|
group the secured path applies to. Considering the previous example,
|
|||
|
now the branches list will contain 'main/Rel2.1' and 'main/2.0'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^acl --^user=vsanchezm -^allowed=-^read -^overrideallowed=+^read ^path:/doc
|
|||
|
(Removes '^read' permission to 'vsanchezm' overriding it in '/doc' path.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Activates a licensed user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^activateuser | ^au <user-name>[ ...] [--^server=<rep-server-spec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
--^server=<rep-server-spec> Activates the user in the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command
|
|||
|
in the default server in the client.conf file.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
repserver specs.)
|
|||
|
user-name The user name or user names to activate. Use double quotes (" ")
|
|||
|
to specify user names containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate user names.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To activate a user, it must have been previously deactivated.
|
|||
|
By default, a user is activated the first time they perform a write
|
|||
|
operation in Unity VCS. The user is automatically activated only if
|
|||
|
the maximum number of users has not been exceeded.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
(See the 'cm ^help ^deactivateuser' command for more information about
|
|||
|
deactivating Unity VCS users.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^activateuser john
|
|||
|
cm ^activateuser david "mary collins"
|
|||
|
cm ^au peter --^server=localhost:8087
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Adds an item to version control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
[--^skipcontentcheck] [--^coparent] [--^filetypes=<file>] [--^noinfo]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
|
|||
|
<item-path>[ ...]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Adds items recursively.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
|
|||
|
continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
|
|||
|
added, its content is not added.
|
|||
|
--^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
|
|||
|
text or binary, it will be set as binary instead of
|
|||
|
checking the content to detect the type. This is done
|
|||
|
to increase performance on huge checkins.
|
|||
|
--^coparent Runs a checkout of the parent of the item being added.
|
|||
|
--^filetypes The filetypes file to use. Check the following link for
|
|||
|
more information:
|
|||
|
http://blog.plasticscm.com/2008/03/custom-file-types.html
|
|||
|
--^noinfo Doesn't print progress information.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
|
|||
|
the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
|||
|
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
item-path The item or items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate items.
|
|||
|
Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements to add items:
|
|||
|
- The parent directory of the item to add must have been previously added.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^add' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single dash
|
|||
|
"-".
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^add -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to add.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^add -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, adds all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
(Adds 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add c:\workspace\file.txt
|
|||
|
(Adds 'file.txt' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds 'src'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add -^R *
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add -^R * --^filetypes=filetypes.conf
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, using
|
|||
|
'filetypes.conf' to assign a type to each file based on its extension,
|
|||
|
instead of checking its content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add --^coparent c:\workspace\dir\file.txt
|
|||
|
(Adds 'file.txt' to source control, and performs a checkout of 'dir'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
|
|||
|
'^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
|
|||
|
could not be added.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN ==
|
|||
|
Executes administrative commands on the server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ADMIN ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^admin <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^readonly
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^admin <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^admin <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ADMIN ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
Only the server administrator can execute administrative commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter
|
|||
|
cm ^admin ^readonly ^status
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
|||
|
Enables/disables the server readonly mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^admin ^readonly (^enter | ^leave | ^status) [<server>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^enter The server enters read-only mode. Write operations will be rejected.
|
|||
|
^leave The server leaves read-only mode.
|
|||
|
^status Shows the server read-only mode status.
|
|||
|
server Executes the command in the specified server (server:port). (Use
|
|||
|
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server specs.)
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, the command works with the server of the
|
|||
|
current workspace.
|
|||
|
If the current path is not in a workspace, the command works with
|
|||
|
the default server defined in the client.conf config file.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ADMIN_READONLY ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
Only the server administrator can enter the server readonly mode.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^admin ^readonly ^enter diana:8086
|
|||
|
cm ^admin ^readonly ^leave
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ANNOTATE ==
|
|||
|
Shows the changeset where each line of a file was last modified and its author.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ANNOTATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^annotate | ^blame <spec>[ ...]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces
|
|||
|
| ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
[--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^stats]
|
|||
|
[--^repository=<repspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^stats Shows statistics information.
|
|||
|
--^repository Specifies a repository spec used to calculate
|
|||
|
the annotations. By default, this command uses the
|
|||
|
repository where the loaded revision repository in the
|
|||
|
workspace is stored. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
|||
|
more about repspecs.)
|
|||
|
spec The spec of the file to annotate.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ANNOTATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Binary files can't be annotated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
|||
|
- ^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
|||
|
- ^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
- ^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
- ^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
- {^owner} User who changed the line the last time.
|
|||
|
- {^rev} Source revision specification of the line.
|
|||
|
- {^content} Line content.
|
|||
|
- {^date} Date when the line was checked in.
|
|||
|
- {^comment} Comment of the source revision of the line.
|
|||
|
- {^changeset} Changeset of the source revision of the line.
|
|||
|
- {^line} Line number of the file.
|
|||
|
- {^id} Item id.
|
|||
|
- {^parentid} Parent id of the item.
|
|||
|
- {^rep} Repository of the item.
|
|||
|
- {^branch} Branch of the source revision of the line.
|
|||
|
- {^ismergerev} Whether the revision of the line was created in a merge.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Date format parameters (--^dateformat):
|
|||
|
To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
|
|||
|
See the supported formats specified at:
|
|||
|
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Repository specification (--^repository):
|
|||
|
To retrieve data from a remote repository. Useful for distributed
|
|||
|
scenarios.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^blame c:\workspace\src --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeolandwhitespaces --^encoding=utf-8
|
|||
|
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner} {^date, 10} {^content}"
|
|||
|
(Writes the owner field, then a blank, then the date field (aligned to
|
|||
|
right), then a blank, and the content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^blame c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{^owner, -7} {^comment} {^date}" \
|
|||
|
--^dateformat=yyyyMMdd
|
|||
|
(Writes the owner field in 7 spaces (aligned to the left) followed by
|
|||
|
a blank, then the comment, followed by another blank, and ending with the
|
|||
|
formatted date (for example, 20170329).)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^annotate c:\workspace\file.txt --^repository=centralRep@myserver:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^blame ^serverpath:/src/client/checkin/Checkin.cs#^cs:73666
|
|||
|
(Annotates the file starting in changeset 73666 using a server path.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_APPLYLOCAL ==
|
|||
|
Checks for local changes (locally moved, locally deleted, and locally changed)
|
|||
|
and applies them, so that Unity VCS starts tracking those changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_APPLYLOCAL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal | ^al [--^dependencies] [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^dependencies Adds local change dependencies into the items to
|
|||
|
apply.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to be applied. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_APPLYLOCAL ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If --^dependencies and <item_path> are not specified, the operation involves
|
|||
|
all the local changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- It is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal foo.c bar.c
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal .
|
|||
|
(Applies all local changes in the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal
|
|||
|
(Applies all local changes in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable
|
|||
|
(Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
|
|||
|
simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^applylocal --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
|||
|
(Applies all local changes in the workspace, and prints the result in a
|
|||
|
simplified, easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines and
|
|||
|
separating the fields with the specified strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ARCHIVE ==
|
|||
|
Archives data in external storage.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ARCHIVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] [-^c=<str_comment>]
|
|||
|
[--^file=<base_file>]
|
|||
|
(Extracts data from the repository and stores it on external storage.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^archive | ^arch <revspec>[ ...] --^restore
|
|||
|
(Restores previously archived revisions back into the repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^c Sets a comment in the archive storage files to create.
|
|||
|
--^file Name prefix and (optional) path for the new archive
|
|||
|
data files.
|
|||
|
--^restore Restores previously archived data from generated archive
|
|||
|
files. The external storage location and the
|
|||
|
externaldata.conf file must be available at the moment
|
|||
|
of the revision restoration. See Remarks for more
|
|||
|
information.
|
|||
|
revspec One or more revision specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about revspecs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ARCHIVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command extracts data from the repository database and store it on
|
|||
|
external storage, saving database space.
|
|||
|
The command can also restore (--^restore) previously archived revisions back
|
|||
|
into the repository database.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify a revspec.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The user running this command must be the Unity VCS server administrator
|
|||
|
(repository server owner) to be allowed to complete the operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Every data segment from the specified revisions will be stored in a
|
|||
|
different file, with a name starting with the value defined by the --^file
|
|||
|
argument. This argument can contain either a full path value including a
|
|||
|
prefix for future archive files or just this prefix value.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once archived, the data from the specified revisions will be accessible in
|
|||
|
two ways:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1. From the client: The client will detect if the data was archived and it
|
|||
|
will prompt the user to enter the location of the files.
|
|||
|
Users can configure the external data location by creating a file named
|
|||
|
externaldata.conf (at the standard configuration files locations, using
|
|||
|
the same rules that apply for the client.conf file) containing the paths
|
|||
|
where archived data have been located.
|
|||
|
2. From the server: This way users won't have to know whether the data was
|
|||
|
archived or not, since requests will be transparently resolved by the
|
|||
|
server. To do so, the administrator will create a file called
|
|||
|
externaldata.conf in the server directory and will fill it with the
|
|||
|
paths where the archived volumes are.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To unarchive (restore) a revision (or set of revisions), the archived
|
|||
|
files must be accessible from the client. Hence, it is not possible to
|
|||
|
unarchive data being resolved by the server (method 2) because the client
|
|||
|
will not be able to identify it as archived.
|
|||
|
If method 2 is used, to unarchive successfully, the administrator will have
|
|||
|
to edit the externaldata.conf server file first to remove access to the
|
|||
|
archived files which have to be unarchived.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Archive example:
|
|||
|
1) Archive one revision:
|
|||
|
cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^file=/Users/ruben/archive/battle
|
|||
|
2) See the archived revision in the specified output path:
|
|||
|
^ls -^al /Users/ruben/archive/battle*
|
|||
|
-rw-r--r-- 1 ruben staff 2220039 Nov 9 10:52 /Users/ruben/archive/battle-100280-167
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Unarchive (restore) example:
|
|||
|
1) Add the output archive folder to the externaldata.conf file:
|
|||
|
^vi /Users/ruben/.plastic4/externaldata.conf
|
|||
|
/Users/ruben/archive
|
|||
|
2) Unarchive the revision:
|
|||
|
cm ^archive Assets/RoofTextures/Textures/Wooden_Roof_05.png --^restore
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^archive' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
|||
|
dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example: cm ^archive -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to archive.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^archive -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, archives all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main
|
|||
|
(Archives the last revision of 'bigfile.zip' in branch 'main'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^archive bigfile.zip#^br:/^main --^restore
|
|||
|
(Restores the archived revision.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^archive ^rev:myfile.pdf#^cs:2 -^c="big pdf file" --^file=c:\arch_files\arch
|
|||
|
(Archives the revision with changeset 2 of myfile.pdf in 'c:\archived_files'
|
|||
|
folder. The archived file name will start with 'arch' (for example, arch_11_56).)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find "^revs ^where ^size > 26214400" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}" \
|
|||
|
--^nototal | cm ^archive -^c="volume00" --^file="volume00" -
|
|||
|
(Archives all the files bigger than 25Mb on files starting with name
|
|||
|
'volume00'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage attributes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^set
|
|||
|
- ^unset
|
|||
|
- ^rename
|
|||
|
- ^edit
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^create status
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status "buildStatus"
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of the task in the CI pipeline"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGELIST ==
|
|||
|
Groups pending changes in changelists.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGELIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist | ^clist [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
(Displays all changelists.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^create <clist_name>
|
|||
|
[<clist_desc>] [--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
(Creates a changelist.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^delete <clist_name> [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
(Deletes the selected changelist. If this changelist contains pending
|
|||
|
changes, then these will be moved to the ^default changelist.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist | ^clist ^edit <clist_name> [<action_name> <action_value>]
|
|||
|
[--^persistent | --^notpersistent] [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
(Edits the selected changelist.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist | ^clist <clist_name> (^add | ^rm) <path_name>[ ...]
|
|||
|
[--^symlink]
|
|||
|
(Edits the selected changelist by adding ('^add') or removing ('^rm') the
|
|||
|
change(s) that match with the given path_name(s). Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate path_names. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
|
|||
|
spaces. The status of the paths must be '^Added' or '^Checked-out'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
clist_name The name of the changelist. A path to a file containing
|
|||
|
the name can be used instead. More info at --^namefile.
|
|||
|
clist_desc The description of the changelist. A path to a file
|
|||
|
containing the description can be used instead. More
|
|||
|
info at --^descriptionfile.
|
|||
|
action_name Choose between '^rename' or '^description' to edit the
|
|||
|
changelist.
|
|||
|
action_value Applies the new name or new description when editing
|
|||
|
the changelist.
|
|||
|
--^persistent The changelist will remain in the workspace even if its
|
|||
|
contents are checked-in or reverted.
|
|||
|
--^notpersistent (Default) The changelist will not remain in the
|
|||
|
workspace even if its contents are checked-in or
|
|||
|
reverted.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
|||
|
target.
|
|||
|
--^namefile A valid path to a file containing the name of the
|
|||
|
changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist and its
|
|||
|
content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
|
|||
|
--^newnamefile A valid path to a file containing the new name of the
|
|||
|
changelist when renaming. Bear in mind the file must exist
|
|||
|
and its content cannot be neither empty nor multiline.
|
|||
|
--^descriptionfile A valid path to a file containing the description for the
|
|||
|
changelist. Bear in mind the file must exist.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGELIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^changelist' command handles both the workspace pending changelists and
|
|||
|
the changes contained in a changelist.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist
|
|||
|
(Shows the current workspace changelists.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^create config_changes "dotConf files" --^persistent
|
|||
|
(Creates a new changelist named 'config_changes' and description 'dotConf
|
|||
|
files' which will remain persistent in the current workspace once the
|
|||
|
pending changelist is either checked-in or reverted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^create --^namefile="name.txt" --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
|
|||
|
(Creates a new changelist which name and description are both taken from files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes ^rename config_files --^notpersistent
|
|||
|
(Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' and renames it to
|
|||
|
'config_files'. Also, it turns the changelist into "not persistent".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^edit config_changes --^notpersistent
|
|||
|
(Edits the changelist named 'config_changes' by turning it into "not persistent".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^delete config_files
|
|||
|
(Removes the pending changelist 'config_files' from the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^delete --namefile="name.txt"
|
|||
|
(Removes the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file from the current
|
|||
|
workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist config_files ^add foo.conf
|
|||
|
(Adds the file 'foo.conf' to the 'config_files' changelist.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist config_files ^rm foo.conf readme.txt
|
|||
|
(Removes the files 'foo.conf' and 'readme.txt' from the 'config_files'
|
|||
|
changelist and moves the files to the system default changelist.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^description --^descriptionfile="desc.txt"
|
|||
|
(Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, changing its
|
|||
|
description to the text content of the 'desc.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changelist ^edit --^namefile="name.txt" ^rename --^newnamefile="newname.txt"
|
|||
|
(Edits the changelist identified by the content of 'name.txt' file, renaming it to
|
|||
|
the text content of the 'newname.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET ==
|
|||
|
Executes advanced operations on changesets.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^move | ^mv
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^editcomment | ^edit
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:2b55f8aa-0b29-410f-b99c-60e573a309ca@devData
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
|
|||
|
Modifies the comment of a changeset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^editcomment | ^edit <csetspec> <new_comment>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
csetspec The target changeset whose comment will be edited.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
new_comment The new comment that will be added to the targeted
|
|||
|
changeset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_EDITCOMMENT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^editcomment ^cs:15@myrepo "I forgot to add the checkin details"
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^edit ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a \
|
|||
|
"This comment text will replace the previous one."
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^edit "89095131-895d-4173-9440-ff9ef9b2538d@project@cloud" \
|
|||
|
"Changing my comment"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Moves a changeset and all its descendants to a different branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^move | ^mv <csetspec> <branchspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
csetspec First changeset to be moved to a different branch. All
|
|||
|
descendant changesets in the same branch will be
|
|||
|
targeted by the command as well.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
branchspec The target branch where the targeted changesets are
|
|||
|
stored. It needs to be empty or non-existing; if the
|
|||
|
destination branch doesn't exist, it will be created by
|
|||
|
the command.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- The targeted changeset spec must be valid.
|
|||
|
- The destination branch must be either empty or non-existing.
|
|||
|
- If the destination branch doesn't exist, it will created.
|
|||
|
- Merge links will be kept unchanged since branches don't affect them.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:15@myrepo ^br:/main/scm005@myrepo
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^move ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a ^br:/hotfix/TL-352
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a changeset from the repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^delete | ^rm <csetspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
csetspec The target changeset to be removed. It must fulfill
|
|||
|
some specific conditions. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- The target changeset must be the last in its branch.
|
|||
|
- The target changeset cannot be the parent of any other changeset.
|
|||
|
- The target changeset cannot be neither the source of a merge link nor
|
|||
|
part of an interval merge as source.
|
|||
|
- No label must be applied to the target changeset.
|
|||
|
- The target changeset must not be the root changeset ('^cs:0').
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^rm ^cs:4525@myrepo@myserver
|
|||
|
cm ^changeset ^delete ^cs:cb11ecdb-1aa9-4f11-8698-dcab14e5885a
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
|||
|
Changes the user's password (UP).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changepassword | ^passwd
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGEUSERPASSWORD ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is only available when the security configuration is UP
|
|||
|
(user/password).
|
|||
|
See the Administrator Guide for more information:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The old and new passwords are required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^passwd
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
|||
|
Checks the connection to the server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkconnection | ^cc
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHECKCONNECTION ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- This command returns a message indicating whether there is a valid
|
|||
|
connection to the configured Unity VCS server.
|
|||
|
- The command checks checks the version compatibility with the server.
|
|||
|
- The command also checks whether the configured user is valid or not.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKDB ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.**
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Checks the repositories integrity.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKDB ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkdatabase | ^chkdb [<repserverspec> | <repspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repositories server.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
repspec Repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHECKDB ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If neither repserverspec nor repspec are specified, the check will be
|
|||
|
performed in the server specified in the client.conf file.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkdatabase ^repserver:localhost:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^chkdb ^rep:default@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Stores changes in the repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^all|-^a] [--^applychanged] [--^private] [--^update] [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
[--^noshowchangeset]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to be checked-in. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
|||
|
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate item paths.
|
|||
|
Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
|
|||
|
-^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset created
|
|||
|
in the checkin operation.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
|||
|
changeset created in the checkin operation.
|
|||
|
--^all | -^a The items changed, moved and deleted locally on the
|
|||
|
given paths are also included.
|
|||
|
--^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
|
|||
|
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
|||
|
items.
|
|||
|
--^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
|
|||
|
included.
|
|||
|
--^update Processes the update-merge automatically if it
|
|||
|
eventually happens.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
--^noshowchangeset Doesn't print the result changeset.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin involves all the
|
|||
|
pending changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
- The checkin operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
|||
|
- To checkin an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- If the item is private (not under source code control), the --^private
|
|||
|
flag is necessary in order to checkin it.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out.
|
|||
|
- If the item is changed but not checked out, the --^applychanged flag
|
|||
|
is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
|
|||
|
wildcards ('*').
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
|
|||
|
checked in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
|||
|
dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example: cm ^checkin -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkin --^all -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkin file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
(Checkins the 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' checked-out files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
|||
|
(Checkins the current directory and sets the comment in the
|
|||
|
'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkin link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Checkins the symlink file and not the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ci file1.txt -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
(Checkins 'file1.txt' and includes a comment.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^short --^compact --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
|
|||
|
(Lists the paths in the changelist named 'pending_to_review' and redirects
|
|||
|
this list to the input of the checkin command.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ci . --^machinereadable
|
|||
|
(Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
|||
|
easier-to-parse format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ci . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
|||
|
(Checkins the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
|||
|
easier-to-parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
|
|||
|
separating the fields with the specified strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Marks files as ready to modify.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^silent] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to be checked-out. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
|||
|
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate item paths.
|
|||
|
Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
|
|||
|
-^R Checks out files recursively.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
|
|||
|
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
|
|||
|
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output at all.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the checkout operation to the symlink and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
|
|||
|
cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
|
|||
|
continue without it.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To checkout an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked-in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
|
|||
|
a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
|
|||
|
and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
|
|||
|
simultaneously checkout.
|
|||
|
You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
|
|||
|
See the Administrator Guide for more information:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/adminguide
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The format string replaces the placeholder '{0}' with the path of the item
|
|||
|
being checked out. Check the examples to see how to use it.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^checkout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
|||
|
dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example: cm ^checkout -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkout.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^checkout -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, checkouts all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
(Checkouts 'file1.txt' and 'file2.txt' files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^co *.txt
|
|||
|
(Checkouts all txt files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout .
|
|||
|
(Checkouts current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
|
|||
|
(Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^co file.txt --^format="Checking out item {0}"
|
|||
|
--^resultformat="Item {0} checked out"
|
|||
|
(Checkouts 'file.txt' using the specified formatting strings
|
|||
|
to show the progress and the result of the operation.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Checkouts the symlink file and not the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkout . -^R --^ignorefailed
|
|||
|
(Recursively checkouts the current folder, ignoring those files that can
|
|||
|
not be checked out.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^co . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
|
|||
|
(Checkouts the current directory, and prints the result in a simplified,
|
|||
|
easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
|||
|
Checks the syntax of a selector.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css --^file=<selector_file>
|
|||
|
(Checks the selector file syntax.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^cat <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
|
|||
|
(Unix. Checks selector file from standard input.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^type <selector_file> | cm ^checkselectorsyntax | ^css -
|
|||
|
(Windows. Checks selector file from standard input.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^file The file to read a selector from.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHECKSELECTORSYNTAX ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command reads a selector on either a file or standard input, and
|
|||
|
checks it for valid syntax. If the syntax check fails, the reason is
|
|||
|
printed on standard output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^checkselectorsyntax --^file=myselector.txt
|
|||
|
(Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^cat myselector.txt | cm ^checkselectorsyntax
|
|||
|
(Checks the syntax of 'myselector.txt' from standard input.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
|
|||
|
Changes an item revision type (binary or text).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changerevisiontype | ^chgrevtype | ^crt <item_path>[ ...] --^type=(^bin | ^txt)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to change revision type. Use double quotes (" ")
|
|||
|
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate item paths.
|
|||
|
--^type Target revisions type. Choose '^bin' or '^txt'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CHANGEREVISIONTYPE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command can only be applied to files, not directories.
|
|||
|
The specified type must be a system supported one: '^bin' or '^txt' (binary
|
|||
|
or text).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^changerevisiontype c:\workspace\file.txt --^type=^txt
|
|||
|
(Changes 'file.txt' revision type to text.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^chgrevtype comp.zip "image file.jpg" --^type=^bin
|
|||
|
(Changes 'comp.zip' and "image file.jpg" revision type to binary.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^crt *.* --^type=^txt
|
|||
|
(Changes revision type of all files to text.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Edits a trigger.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^edit <subtype_type> <position_number>
|
|||
|
[--^position=<new_position>]
|
|||
|
[--^name=<new_name>] [--^script=<script_path>]
|
|||
|
[--^filter=<str_filter>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^position New position of the specified trigger.
|
|||
|
This position must not be in use by another
|
|||
|
trigger of the same type.
|
|||
|
--^name New name of the specified trigger.
|
|||
|
--^script New execution path of the specified trigger script.
|
|||
|
If the script starts with "^webtrigger ", it will be
|
|||
|
considered as a web trigger. See Remarks for more
|
|||
|
further details.
|
|||
|
--^filter Checks only items that match the specified filter.
|
|||
|
--^server Modifies the trigger on the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
subtype_type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
|||
|
types.)
|
|||
|
position_number Position occupied by the trigger to be modified.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
|
|||
|
as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
|
|||
|
against the specified URI, where the request body contains a JSON
|
|||
|
dictionary with the trigger environment variables, and a fixed INPUT key
|
|||
|
pointing to an array of strings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-setselector 6 --^name="Backup2 manager" --^script="/new/path/al/script"
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^edit ^after-add 2 --^script="^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CODEREVIEW ==
|
|||
|
Creates, edits, or deletes code reviews.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CODEREVIEW ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview <spec> <title> [--^status=<status_name>]
|
|||
|
[--^assignee=<user_name>] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
(Creates a code review.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview -^e <id> [--^status=<status_name>] [--^assignee=<user_name>]
|
|||
|
[--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
(Edits a code review.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview -^d <id> [ ...] [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
(Deletes one or more code reviews.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^e Edits the parameters of an existing code review.
|
|||
|
-^d Deletes one or more existing code reviews. Use a
|
|||
|
whitespace to separate the code reviews IDs.
|
|||
|
--^status Sets the new status of a code review. See Remarks for
|
|||
|
additional information.
|
|||
|
--^assignee Sets the new assignee of a code review.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for additional information.
|
|||
|
--^repository Sets the repository to be used as default. (Use
|
|||
|
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository specs.)
|
|||
|
spec It can be either a changeset spec, a shelve spec or a branch spec.
|
|||
|
It will be the target of the new code review. (Use 'cm ^help
|
|||
|
^objectspec' to learn more about changeset or branch specs.)
|
|||
|
title A text string to be used as title of the new code review.
|
|||
|
id The code review identification number. A GUID can be used as
|
|||
|
well.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CODEREVIEW ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to manage code reviews: create, edit, and delete
|
|||
|
code reviews for changesets or branches.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To create a new code review, a changeset/branch spec and a title are
|
|||
|
required. The initial status and assignee can be set, too. An ID (or GUID
|
|||
|
if requested) will be returned as a result.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To edit or delete an existing code review, the target code review ID
|
|||
|
(or GUID) is required. No messages are displayed if there are no errors.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The 'status parameter' must only be one of the following: "^Under ^review"
|
|||
|
(default), "^Reviewed", or "^Rework ^required".
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The 'repository' parameter is available to set the default working
|
|||
|
repository. This is useful when the user wants to manage reviews on
|
|||
|
a server different than the one associated to the current workspace, or
|
|||
|
when there is no current workspace at all.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
{0} id
|
|||
|
{1} guid
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Please note that the '--^format' parameter only takes effect when creating
|
|||
|
a new code review.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview ^cs:1856@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" --^assignee=dummy
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview ^br:/main/task001@myrepo@myserver:8084 "My code review" \
|
|||
|
--^status=^"Rework required" --^assignee=newbie --^format="{^id} -> {^guid}"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview 1367 -^e --^assignee=new_assignee
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview -^e 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 --^status=Reviewed
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview -^d 1367 --^repository=myremoterepo@myremoteserver:18084
|
|||
|
cm ^codereview 27658884-5dcc-49b7-b0ef-a5760ae740a3 -^d
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CRYPT ==
|
|||
|
Encrypts a password.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CRYPT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^crypt <mypassword>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
mypassword Password to be encrypted.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CRYPT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command encrypts a given password passed as argument.
|
|||
|
It is designed to encrypt passwords in configuration files and increase
|
|||
|
safety.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^crypt dbconfpassword -> ENCRYPTED: encrypteddbconfpassword
|
|||
|
(Encrypts the password in the database configuration file: 'db.conf'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Deactivates a licensed user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^deactivateuser | ^du <usr_name>[ ...] [--^server=<name:port>]
|
|||
|
[--^nosolveuser]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Deactivates the user on the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client.
|
|||
|
--^nosolveuser With this option, the command will not check whether
|
|||
|
the user name exists on the authentication system. The
|
|||
|
<usr_name> must be a user SID.
|
|||
|
usr_name The user name(s) to deactivate. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate user names. If SID, then '--^nosolveuser' is required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_DEACTIVATEUSER ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command sets a user to inactive, disabling the usage of Unity VCS
|
|||
|
for that user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
See the 'cm ^activateuser' command for more information about activating
|
|||
|
Unity VCS users.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command checks whether the user exists on the underlying authentication
|
|||
|
system (e.g. ActiveDirectory, LDAP, User/Password...).
|
|||
|
To force the deactivation of a user that no longer exists on the
|
|||
|
authentication system, you can use the '--^nosolveuser' option.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^deactivateuser john
|
|||
|
cm ^du peter "mary collins"
|
|||
|
cm ^deactivateuser john --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^deactivateuser S-1-5-21-3631250224-3045023395-1892523819-1107 --^nosolveuser
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFF ==
|
|||
|
Shows differences between files, changesets, and labels.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_DIFF ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec> [<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>]
|
|||
|
[<path>]
|
|||
|
[--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
|
|||
|
[--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
[--^clean]
|
|||
|
[--^integration]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
(Shows differences between a 'source' changeset or shelveset, and a
|
|||
|
'destination' changeset or shelveset. The changesets can be specified
|
|||
|
using either a changeset or label specification.
|
|||
|
Where two specifications are given, the first will be the 'source' of
|
|||
|
the diff; the second, the 'destination'.
|
|||
|
If only one specification is given, the 'source' will be the parent
|
|||
|
changeset of the specified 'destination'.
|
|||
|
If an optional path is specified, the Diff window will launch to show
|
|||
|
differences between the two revisions of that file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff <revspec1> <revspec2>
|
|||
|
(Shows differences between a pair of revisions. The differences are
|
|||
|
shown in the Diff window. The first revision specified will appear on
|
|||
|
the left.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff <brspec> [--^added] [--^changed] [--^moved] [--^deleted]
|
|||
|
[--^repositorypaths] [--^download=<download_path>]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
[--^clean]
|
|||
|
[--^integration]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^fullpaths | --^fp]
|
|||
|
(Shows the branch differences. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
|
|||
|
about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^added Prints only differences consisting of items added to
|
|||
|
the repository.
|
|||
|
--^changed Prints only differences consisting of items that
|
|||
|
changed.
|
|||
|
--^moved Prints only differences consisting of moved or renamed
|
|||
|
items.
|
|||
|
--^deleted Prints only differences consisting of items that were
|
|||
|
deleted.
|
|||
|
--^repositorypaths Prints repository paths instead of workspace paths.
|
|||
|
(This option overrides the '--^fullpaths' option.)
|
|||
|
--^download Stores the differences content in the specified output
|
|||
|
path.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^clean Does not take into account the differences generated
|
|||
|
because of a merge, but only the differences created by
|
|||
|
simple checkins.
|
|||
|
--^integration Shows the branch changes that are pending to be merged into
|
|||
|
its parent branch. It takes into account any rebase or
|
|||
|
prior merge already done from/to its parent branch.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
--^fullpaths, --^fp Forces printing full workspace paths for files and
|
|||
|
directories when possible.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_DIFF ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
File status:
|
|||
|
If '--^added', '--^changed', '--^moved' or '--^deleted' are
|
|||
|
not specified, then the command prints all differences.
|
|||
|
'^A' means added items.
|
|||
|
'^C' means changed items.
|
|||
|
'^D' means deleted items.
|
|||
|
'^M' means moved items. The left item is the original, the right is the destination.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
|||
|
^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
|||
|
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^path} Item path.
|
|||
|
{^date} Change date/time.
|
|||
|
{^owner} Change author.
|
|||
|
{^revid} Revision id of the revision considered as the
|
|||
|
destination in the diff.
|
|||
|
{^parentrevid} Revision id of the parent of the revision considered
|
|||
|
as the destination of the diff.
|
|||
|
{^baserevid} Revision id of the revision considered as the source
|
|||
|
in the diff.
|
|||
|
{^srccmpath} Server path before moving the item (move operation).
|
|||
|
{^dstcmpath} Server path after moving the item (move operation).
|
|||
|
{^type} Item type: ^D (directory), ^B (binary file), ^F (text
|
|||
|
file), ^S (symlink), ^X (Xlink)
|
|||
|
{^repository} Repository of the item.
|
|||
|
{^status} Item status: ^A (added), ^D (deleted), ^M (moved), ^C
|
|||
|
(changed)
|
|||
|
{^fsprotection} Shows item permissions (Linux/Mac chmod).
|
|||
|
{^srcfsprotection} Shows parent revision item permissions.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Notes on '^revid':
|
|||
|
For added items, the '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' will be -1, as no
|
|||
|
previous revision exists in this case.
|
|||
|
For deleted items, the '^revid' is the id of the source revision, and the
|
|||
|
'^baserevid' will be -1, as there is no destination revision.
|
|||
|
For Xlinks, both '^baserevid' and '^parentrevid' are always -1.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparing branches:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 \doc\readme.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^br:/main/task001 --^integration
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparing changeset trees:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff 19
|
|||
|
cm ^diff 19 25
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:25 --^format="{^path} {^parentrevid}"
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^format="{^date} {^path}" --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^changed
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^repositorypaths
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^download="D:\temp"
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 --^clean
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:19 ^cs:23 \doc\readme.txt
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparing label trees:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^lb:FirstReleaseLabel ^lb:SecondReleaseLabel
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^lb:tag_193.2 ^cs:34214
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^cs:31492 ^lb:tag_193.2
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparing shelve trees:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^sh:2
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparing revspecs:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
|
|||
|
^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^rev:foo.c#^cs:1 ^rev:foo.c#^cs:2 --^comparisonmethod=^ignoreeol
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
|||
|
Shows diff metrics between two revs.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diffmetrics | ^dm <revspec1> <revspec2> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces |
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the specified comparison method.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
revspec Revisions used to compare.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_DIFFMETRICS ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The metrics are: number of changed, added, and deleted lines.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{0} Number of changed lines.
|
|||
|
{1} Number of added lines.
|
|||
|
{2} Number of deleted lines.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods (--^comparisonmethod option):
|
|||
|
^ignoreeol Ignores the end of line differences.
|
|||
|
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores the whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^recognizeall Detects the end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diffmetrics file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^br:/main/scm0211 \
|
|||
|
--^format="There are {0} changed, {1} added and {2} deleted lines."
|
|||
|
(Retrieves diffmetrics results formatted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^dm file.txt#^cs:2 file.txt#^cs:3 --^encoding=utf-8 --^comparisonmethod=^ignorewhitespaces
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTEXPORT ==
|
|||
|
Exports a repository in fast-export format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FASTEXPORT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-export | ^fe <repspec> <fast-export-file>
|
|||
|
[--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
|
|||
|
[--^nodata] [--^from=<changesetid>] [--^to=<changesetid>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repspec The repository which the data will be exported from.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
|||
|
fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git fast-export
|
|||
|
format.
|
|||
|
--^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports. This file
|
|||
|
has been previously exported by '--^export-marks'. The
|
|||
|
changesets described in this file will not be imported
|
|||
|
because they were already in a previous import.
|
|||
|
--^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will be saved.
|
|||
|
This file is used in a later fast-import to signal the
|
|||
|
changesets that have been already imported.
|
|||
|
--^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in the branch
|
|||
|
hierarchy. This option allows using char as a hierarchy
|
|||
|
separator, so main-task-sub would be mapped in Unity VCS
|
|||
|
as /main/task/sub.
|
|||
|
--^nodata Exports the repository without including the data. This
|
|||
|
is useful to check if the export will run correctly.
|
|||
|
--^from Exports from a particular changeset.
|
|||
|
--^to Exports to a particular changeset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FASTEXPORT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- To import a Unity VCS repository to Git, use a command such as:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^cat repo.fe.00 | ^git ^fast-import --^export-marks=marks.git --^import-marks=marks.git
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Incremental export is supported using a marks file that contains the
|
|||
|
changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
|
|||
|
files).
|
|||
|
This means that only the new changesets that were not exported in the
|
|||
|
previous fast-export will be exported.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^import-marks=marks.cm \
|
|||
|
--^export-marks=marks.cm
|
|||
|
(Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
|
|||
|
file in Git fast-export format and creates the marks files to perform
|
|||
|
incremental exports later.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-export repo@localhost:8087 repo.fe.00 --^from=20
|
|||
|
(Exports the repository 'repo' in the local server into the 'repo.fe.00'
|
|||
|
file in Git fast-export format from changeset '20'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FASTIMPORT ==
|
|||
|
Imports Git fast-export data into a repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FASTIMPORT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-import | ^fi <repspec> <fast-export-file>
|
|||
|
[--^import-marks=<marks_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^export-marks=<marks_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^stats] [--^branchseparator=<chr_separator>]
|
|||
|
[--^nodata] [--^ignoremissingchangesets] [--^mastertomain]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repspec The repository into which the data will be
|
|||
|
imported. It is created if it did not previously
|
|||
|
exist. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more
|
|||
|
about rep specs.)
|
|||
|
fast-export-file The file with the repository data in Git
|
|||
|
fast-export format.
|
|||
|
--^import-marks The marks file used for incremental imports.
|
|||
|
This file has been previously exported by
|
|||
|
'--^export-marks'. The changesets described in
|
|||
|
this file wont be imported because they
|
|||
|
were already in a previous import.
|
|||
|
--^export-marks The file where the imported changesets will
|
|||
|
be saved. This file is used in a later
|
|||
|
fast-import to signal the changesets that have
|
|||
|
been already imported.
|
|||
|
--^stats Prints some statistics about the import process.
|
|||
|
--^branchseparator Unity VCS uses "/" as default separator in
|
|||
|
the branch hierarchy. This option allows using
|
|||
|
char as a hierarchy separator, so main-task-sub
|
|||
|
would be mapped in Unity VCS as /main/task/sub.
|
|||
|
--^nodata Imports Git fast-export without including the
|
|||
|
data. This is useful to check if the import will
|
|||
|
run correctly.
|
|||
|
--^ignoremissingchangesets Any changesets that cannot be imported are
|
|||
|
discarded and the fast-import operation
|
|||
|
continues without them.
|
|||
|
--^mastertomain Imports using "^main" instead of "^master".
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FASTIMPORT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- To export a Git repository, use a command such as:
|
|||
|
^git ^fast-export --^all -^M --^signed-tags=^strip --^tag-of-filtered-object=^drop> ..\git-fast-export.dat
|
|||
|
The -^M option is important to detect moved items.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- The specified repository is created in case it did not exist.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Incremental import is supported using a marks file that contains the
|
|||
|
changesets previously imported ('--^import-marks' and '--^export-marks'
|
|||
|
files).
|
|||
|
This means that only the new changesets that were not imported in the
|
|||
|
previous fast-import will be imported.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-import mynewrepo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export
|
|||
|
(Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
|
|||
|
'mynewrepo' repository on server 'atenea:8084'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-import repo@atenea:8084 repo.fast-export --^export-marks=rep.marks
|
|||
|
(Imports the contents exported in the 'repo.fast-export' file into
|
|||
|
'repo' repository on server 'atenea:8084' and creates a marks file
|
|||
|
to perform incremental imports later.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fast-import repo@server:8084 repo.fast-export --^import-marks=repo.marks \
|
|||
|
--^export-marks=repo.marks
|
|||
|
(Imports the contents of the 'repo.fast-export' file. Only the new
|
|||
|
changesets that were not in the marks file are imported. The same marks
|
|||
|
file is used to save the list of changesets again for the next
|
|||
|
incremental import.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FILEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Retrieves detailed information about the items in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FILEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo <item_path>[ ...] [--^fields=<field_value>[,...]]
|
|||
|
[[--^xml | -^x [=<output_file>]] | [--^format=<str_format>]]
|
|||
|
[--^symlink] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^fields A string of comma-separated values. This selects which
|
|||
|
fields will be printed for each item. See Remarks for
|
|||
|
more information.
|
|||
|
--^xml | -^x Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
|||
|
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
|||
|
with '--^xml'.
|
|||
|
This '--^format' option prevails over '--^fields' if both
|
|||
|
are specified.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the fileinfo operation to the symlink and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
item_path Items to display. Use a whitespace to separate the items.
|
|||
|
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FILEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command prints a detailed list of attributes for each selected item.
|
|||
|
Each attribute is printed on a new line by default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The attribute list can be modified to display only the attributes the user
|
|||
|
needs. This can be achieved using the '--^fields=<field_list>' which accepts
|
|||
|
a string of comma-separated attribute names. This way, only those arguments
|
|||
|
whose name has been indicated are shown.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Revision head changeset:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This option is disabled by default. Please note that retrieving this
|
|||
|
attribute is significantly slower than the rest of them, so we advise users
|
|||
|
to group together as many items as possible. This will improve execution
|
|||
|
times by avoiding many separate 'cm ^fileinfo' executions.
|
|||
|
Also, this feature is not currently available for controlled directories.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can find below the complete list of available attribute names.
|
|||
|
Names marked with an asterisk ('*') will not be shown by default:
|
|||
|
^ClientPath The local path on disk for the item.
|
|||
|
^RelativePath The workspace-relative path.
|
|||
|
^ServerPath The repository path for the item.
|
|||
|
^Size Item size.
|
|||
|
^Hash Item hash sum.
|
|||
|
^Owner The user the item belongs to.
|
|||
|
^RevisionHeadChangeset (*) The changeset of the revision loaded in the
|
|||
|
head changeset of the branch.
|
|||
|
(Please see note above.)
|
|||
|
^RevisionChangeset The changeset of the revision currently loaded
|
|||
|
in the workspace.
|
|||
|
^RepSpec The repository specification for the item.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
rep specs.)
|
|||
|
^Status The workspace item status: added, checked out,
|
|||
|
deleted, etc.
|
|||
|
^Type Revision type (text, binary, directory, symlink,
|
|||
|
or unknown).
|
|||
|
^Changelist The changelist the item belongs to (if any).
|
|||
|
^IsLocked (*) Whether the item is locked by exclusive
|
|||
|
checkout or not.
|
|||
|
^LockedBy (*) The user who exclusively checked out the item.
|
|||
|
^LockedWhere (*) The location where the item was exclusively
|
|||
|
checked out.
|
|||
|
^IsUnderXlink Whether the item is located under an Xlink
|
|||
|
or not.
|
|||
|
^UnderXlinkTarget The target of the Xlink the item is under
|
|||
|
(if any).
|
|||
|
^UnderXlinkPath The item server path in the Xlinked repository
|
|||
|
(if any).
|
|||
|
^UnderXlinkWritable Whether the Xlink the item belongs to is
|
|||
|
writable or not.
|
|||
|
^UnderXlinkRelative Whether the Xlink the items belongs to is
|
|||
|
relative or not.
|
|||
|
^IsXlink Whether the item itself is a Xlink or not.
|
|||
|
^XlinkTarget The target repository the item points to, if it
|
|||
|
is a Xlink.
|
|||
|
^XlinkName The Xlink name of the item, if it is
|
|||
|
actually one.
|
|||
|
^XlinkWritable Whether the Xlink item is a writable Xlink
|
|||
|
or not.
|
|||
|
^XlinkRelative Whether the Xlink item is a relative Xlink
|
|||
|
or not.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- {^ClientPath}
|
|||
|
- {^RelativePath}
|
|||
|
- {^ServerPath}
|
|||
|
- {^Size}
|
|||
|
- {^Hash}
|
|||
|
- {^Owner}
|
|||
|
- {^RevisionHeadChangeset}
|
|||
|
- {^RevisionChangeset}
|
|||
|
- {^Status}
|
|||
|
- {^Type}
|
|||
|
- {^Changelist}
|
|||
|
- {^IsLocked}
|
|||
|
- {^LockedBy}
|
|||
|
- {^LockedWhere}
|
|||
|
- {^IsUnderXlink}
|
|||
|
- {^UnderXlinkTarget}
|
|||
|
- {^UnderXlinkPath}
|
|||
|
- {^UnderXlinkWritable}
|
|||
|
- {^UnderXlinkRelative}
|
|||
|
- {^IsXlink}
|
|||
|
- {^XlinkTarget}
|
|||
|
- {^XlinkName}
|
|||
|
- {^XlinkWritable}
|
|||
|
- {^XlinkRelative}
|
|||
|
- {^RepSpec}
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Please note that '--^format' and '--^xml' options are mutually exclusive, so
|
|||
|
they can't be used at the same time.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo file1.txt file2.txt dir/
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo "New Project.csproj" --^xml
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo assets.art --^fields=^ServerPath,^Size,^IsLocked,^LockedBy
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo proj_specs.docx --^fields=^ServerPath,^RevisionChangeset --^xml
|
|||
|
cm ^fileinfo samples.ogg --^format="{^ServerPath}[{^Owner}] -> {^Size}"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FIND ==
|
|||
|
Runs SQL-like queries to find Unity VCS objects.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FIND ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find <object_type>
|
|||
|
[^where <str_conditions>]
|
|||
|
[^on ^repository '<repspec>' | ^on ^repositories '<repspec1>','<repspec2>'[,...]]
|
|||
|
[^order ^by <sort_field> ['^asc' | '^desc']]
|
|||
|
[[^limit <maxresults>] [^offset <offset>]]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^nototal] [--^file=<dump_file>] [--^xml]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
|
|||
|
Read the 'cm ^find' guide to see all the object
|
|||
|
attributes that can be used as output format strings:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
--^nototal Does not output record count at the end.
|
|||
|
--^file File to dump results.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
str_conditions Searches conditions on an object attributes.
|
|||
|
repspec Searches repositories alias or specification.
|
|||
|
In the case of '^on ^repositories', use a comma to
|
|||
|
separate the repspec fields.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specifications.)
|
|||
|
sort_field The name of the field to use as sorting field. Mind there is only
|
|||
|
a subset of field possibilities. Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects'
|
|||
|
to find what objects are allowed to be ordered and by what fields.
|
|||
|
maxresults The maximun number of results returned by the query.
|
|||
|
offset The number of rows to skip before starting to return results
|
|||
|
from the query.
|
|||
|
object_type Object type to find.
|
|||
|
Some of these objects are implementing the '^order ^by' clause.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^showfindobjects' to learn how to specify these
|
|||
|
objects, the ones allowing '^order ^by' and by what fields.
|
|||
|
You can also read the 'cm ^find' guide:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/cmfind
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FIND ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no repository is specified, the search is made on the repository
|
|||
|
configured in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When you run queries using comparison operators (>, <, >=, <=) from the
|
|||
|
command line, remember that the shell considers these operators as IO
|
|||
|
redirections. So you will need to enclose the queries in double quotation
|
|||
|
marks.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The 'cm ^find' command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
Each output parameter is identified by a string and the user can refer it
|
|||
|
by typing the parameter number between '{' and '}' brackets.
|
|||
|
Output parameters usually correspond to the attributes of the object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These are some valid output format strings:
|
|||
|
- --^format={^id}{^date}{^name}
|
|||
|
- --^format="{^item}#{^branch} ^with ^date {^date}"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
XML and encoding considerations:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the '--^xml' option is specified, the command shows the command result
|
|||
|
as an XML text in the standard output. The operating system default encoding
|
|||
|
is used to show the text, so it is possible that not-ANSI characters are
|
|||
|
incorrectly visualized in the console. If you redirect the command output to
|
|||
|
a file, it will be correctly visualized. When both '--^xml' and '--^file'
|
|||
|
options are specified, the default encoding will be utf-8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset=23 ^and ^owner='maria'"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^on ^repository 'rep1'"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^on ^repositories 'rep1', '^rep:default@localhost:8084'"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^parent='^br:/main' ^on ^repository 'rep1'"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^format="{^item}#{^branch}"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item='^item:.'" --^xml --^file=c:\queryresults\revs.xml
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^owner='^me' ^limit 10 ^offset 20"
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branches "^where ^owner='^me' ^order ^by ^branchname ^desc ^limit 10"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Gets a list of changed files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FINDCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findchanged | ^fc [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^checkcontent]
|
|||
|
[--^onlychanged] [<path>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively finds in directories.
|
|||
|
--^checkcontent Compares files by content.
|
|||
|
--^onlychanged Finds only changed files; checkouts will not be
|
|||
|
obtained.
|
|||
|
path (Default: current directory.)
|
|||
|
Initial path to find changed files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FINDCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no '--^checkcontent' option is given, Unity VCS finds changes based on
|
|||
|
the file timestamp.
|
|||
|
When '--^checkcontent' option is specified, the file or folder contents are
|
|||
|
compared, instead of using the timestamp.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is useful to detect changed files while disconnected from
|
|||
|
the Unity VCS server. The output can be piped to the ^checkout command,
|
|||
|
to check the changes later (see examples).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findchanged .
|
|||
|
(Finds changed files in the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findchanged -^R . | cm ^checkout -
|
|||
|
(Checkouts changed elements.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Gets a list of checked out items.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findcheckouts | ^fco [--^format=<str_format>] [--^basepath]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^basepath The path to start searching checkouts from. If not
|
|||
|
specified, the current path is used.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FINDCHECKEDOUT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is useful to checkin or undocheckout all checked out items in
|
|||
|
one single step, redirecting the standard output to other command.
|
|||
|
See examples.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{0} Date.
|
|||
|
{1} Owner.
|
|||
|
{2} Workspace info.
|
|||
|
{3} Client machine name.
|
|||
|
{4} Item path.
|
|||
|
{5} Branch and repository info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findcheckouts --^format="File {4} changed on branch {5}"
|
|||
|
(Finds checked out items and formats the output with file path and branch
|
|||
|
and repository info.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^checkin -
|
|||
|
(Checkins all checked out items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findcheckouts --^format={4} | cm ^undocheckout -
|
|||
|
(Undocheckouts of all checked out items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^status instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Gets a list of private items.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^findprivate | ^fp [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^exclusions] [<path>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively finds in directories.
|
|||
|
--^exclusions This option allows cutting the search inside the ignored
|
|||
|
paths, defined by the file ignore.conf.
|
|||
|
path (Default: current directory.)
|
|||
|
Initial path to find private files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_FINDPRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If any path is specified, Unity VCS will begin searching from the
|
|||
|
current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is useful to add private items on a folder, piping the output
|
|||
|
to the '^add' command. See examples.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findprivate .
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^findprivate -^R | cm ^add -
|
|||
|
(Recursively searches private items and add them.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETCONFIG ==
|
|||
|
Obtains configuration info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETCONFIG ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getconfig [^setfileasreadonly] [^location] [^extensionworkingmode]
|
|||
|
[^extensionprefix] [^defaultrepserver]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^setfileasreadonly Returns whether the protected files are left as
|
|||
|
read-only or not.
|
|||
|
^location Returns the client config path.
|
|||
|
^extensionworkingmode Returns the extension working mode.
|
|||
|
^extensionprefix Returns the configured extension prefix.
|
|||
|
^defaultrepserver Returns the location of the default repository
|
|||
|
server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETCONFIG ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getconfig ^setfileasreadonly
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETFILE ==
|
|||
|
Downloads the content of a given revision.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETFILE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getfile | ^cat <revspec>[[;<output_file>] | [--^file=<output_file>]]
|
|||
|
[--^debug] [--^symlink] [--^raw]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^file File to save the output. By default, it is printed on the
|
|||
|
standard output. Only usable when a single revision is
|
|||
|
required. If more than one ^revspec is provided, this
|
|||
|
option should be avoided and use '^revspec;^outputfile'
|
|||
|
instead, adding as much pairs as needed separated by
|
|||
|
whitespaces.
|
|||
|
--^debug When a directory specification is used, the command
|
|||
|
shows all the items in the directory, its revision id
|
|||
|
and file system protection.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
|||
|
target.
|
|||
|
--^raw Displays the raw data of the file.
|
|||
|
revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
|||
|
more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETFILE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^cat myfile.txt#^br:/main
|
|||
|
(Obtains the last revision in branch '^br:/main' of 'myfile.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getfile myfile.txt#^cs:3 --^file=tmp.txt
|
|||
|
(Obtains the changeset 3 of 'myfile.txt' and write it to file 'tmp.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^cat ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^br:/main/task003@myrepo
|
|||
|
(Obtains the contents of '/src/foo.c' at the last changeset of branch
|
|||
|
'/main/task003' in repository 'myrepo'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Obtains the revision with id 1230.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getfile ^rev:info\ --^debug
|
|||
|
(Obtains all revisions in the 'info' directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getfile "^revid:25@^rep:^default@^repserver:^localhost:8084;file_revid25.txt"
|
|||
|
"^revid:16@^rep:^default@^repserver:^localhost:8084;file_revid_16.txt"
|
|||
|
(Obtains two different revisions and stores each one on different files.
|
|||
|
To list ^revid it is possible to use the command '^cm ^find ^revision'.
|
|||
|
Mind that, to specify 'spec;dest_file' collections, it might be needed to
|
|||
|
quote the pairs individually, then separate them using whitespaces).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETREVISION ==
|
|||
|
Loads a revision in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETREVISION ==
|
|||
|
This command modifies the revision loaded in the workspace, so it can affect
|
|||
|
future merges.
|
|||
|
It is an advanced command inherited from old versions, so use it with care.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^getrevision <revspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
revspec Object specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
|||
|
more about rev specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETREVISION ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getrevision file.txt#^cs:3
|
|||
|
(Gets changeset 3 revision of 'file.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETSTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Gets the status of an item.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETSTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getstatus | ^gs <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^stats]
|
|||
|
[-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^stats Prints some statistics about the get status process.
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Shows recursively the status in directories.
|
|||
|
item_path Item or items to get status from. Use double quotes
|
|||
|
(" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
|
|||
|
whitespace to separate paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETSTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
{0} Item path.
|
|||
|
{1} Item status:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Where status can take values among the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
0 private
|
|||
|
1 checked in
|
|||
|
2 checked out
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^getstatus' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
|||
|
single dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^getstatus -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which paths to get the status for.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^getstatus --^format="Path {0} Status {1}" -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, gets the status of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getstatus file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
(Gets the status of the files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^gs info\ -^R --^format="The item {0} has the status {1}"
|
|||
|
(Gets the status of the directory and all of its items and shows a
|
|||
|
formatted output.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
|||
|
Gets branches linked with a task.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^gettaskbranches | ^gtb <task_name> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
task_name The task identifier.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETTASKBRANCHES ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
{^name} Branch name.
|
|||
|
{^owner} Owner of the branch.
|
|||
|
{^date} Date when the branch was created.
|
|||
|
{^parent} Parent branch.
|
|||
|
{^comment} Comment of the branch.
|
|||
|
{^repname} Repository where the branch exists.
|
|||
|
{^repserver} Server name.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^gettaskbranches 4311
|
|||
|
cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name}"
|
|||
|
cm ^gtb 4311 --^format="^br:{^name} {^date}" --^dateformat="yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm:ss"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Shows info about the workspace selector.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspaceinfo | ^wi [<wk_path>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of a workspace on the machine.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETWORKSPACEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
The '^wi' command shows the working configuration of a workspace (repository,
|
|||
|
branch, and/or label).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^wi c:\mywk
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
|
|||
|
Gets workspace info from a path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getworkspacefrompath | ^gwp <item_path> [--^format=<str_format>] [--^extended]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^extended Displays more information regarding the workspace: ^type
|
|||
|
and ^dynamic on top of the others. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
item_path File or folder on disk.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_GETWORKSPACEFROMPATH ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command shows information about the workspace that is located in path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
|
|||
|
{1} | {^wkpath} Workspace path.
|
|||
|
{2} | {^machine} Client machine name.
|
|||
|
{3} | {^owner} Workspace owner.
|
|||
|
{4} | {^guid} Workspace GUID.
|
|||
|
{5} | {^type} Workspace type: partial (gluon) or regular.
|
|||
|
{6} | {^dynamic} A workspace can be dynamic (plasticfs) or static.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^getworkspacefrompath c:\myworkspace\code\file1.cpp --^format="Workspace name: {^wkname}"
|
|||
|
cm ^gwp . --^format="Name: {^wkname} | Type: {^type}, {^dynamic}"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_HELP ==
|
|||
|
Gets help for a Unity VCS command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_HELP ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^help <command>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_HELP ==
|
|||
|
Mind this command is partially overlapped with the --^help option at each command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_IOSTATS ==
|
|||
|
Shows statistics about the hardware.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_IOSTATS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^iostats [<repserverspec>] [<list_of_tests>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[--^nettotalmb=<value_mb>] [--^networkiterations=<value_iter>]
|
|||
|
[--^diskdatasize=<value_size>] [--^disktestpath=<value_path>]
|
|||
|
[--^systemdisplaytime=<value_time>]
|
|||
|
[--^systemdisplaytimeinterval=<value_interval>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^nettotalmb Indicates the amount of user data (in
|
|||
|
MegaBytes) transmitted on a network test,
|
|||
|
such as "^serverDownloadTest" or
|
|||
|
"^serverUploadTest".
|
|||
|
It must be a value between "4" and "512".
|
|||
|
(Default: 16)
|
|||
|
--^networkiterations Indicates the number of iterations of
|
|||
|
"^serverDownloadTest" and/or "^serverUploadTest"
|
|||
|
that will be run.
|
|||
|
It must be a value between "1" and "100".
|
|||
|
(Default: 1)
|
|||
|
--^diskdatasize Indicates the amount of data (in MegaBytes)
|
|||
|
that will be written and then read on the
|
|||
|
"^diskTest".
|
|||
|
It must be a value between "100" and "4096".
|
|||
|
(Default: 512)
|
|||
|
--^disktestpath Path where the "^diskTest" writes the test
|
|||
|
files. If this parameter is not provided,
|
|||
|
the command will try to use the system temp
|
|||
|
path.
|
|||
|
--^systemdisplaytime Time interval (in seconds) showing the usage
|
|||
|
of system resources. This option is available
|
|||
|
for the following tests: "^systemNetworkUsage"
|
|||
|
and "^systemDiskUsage".
|
|||
|
It must be a value between "1" and "3600".
|
|||
|
(Default: 5 seconds).
|
|||
|
--^systemdisplaytimeinterval Time interval (in seconds) between the
|
|||
|
system performance samples. This option is
|
|||
|
available for the following tests:
|
|||
|
"^systemNetworkUsage" and "^systemDiskUsage".
|
|||
|
It must be a value between "1" and "60".
|
|||
|
(Default: 1 second).
|
|||
|
repserverspec An available Unity VCS server to perform
|
|||
|
the network tests, such as "serverUploadTest"
|
|||
|
and/ or "serverDownloadTest".
|
|||
|
If no server is provided, the command tries
|
|||
|
to communicate with the server configured by
|
|||
|
default.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
server specs.)
|
|||
|
list_of_tests Available tests. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
test fields. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_IOSTATS ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command requires an available server be used during the network
|
|||
|
speed tests ("^serverUploadTest" and/or "^serverDownloadTest").
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '--^diskTestPath' must point to a path that belongs to the physical
|
|||
|
disk drive about to be tested. If no path is specified, the command tries
|
|||
|
to use the system default temp path.
|
|||
|
The disk drive of the specified path must have enough free space to execute
|
|||
|
the test.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
During the command execution, the system can experience a degraded
|
|||
|
performance caused by the tests performed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Available tests:
|
|||
|
--^serveruploadtest (Default) Measures the data upload speed from
|
|||
|
Unity VCS client to the server.
|
|||
|
--^serverdownloadtest (Default) Measures the data download speed from
|
|||
|
Unity VCS server to the client.
|
|||
|
--^disktest (Default) Measures the disk read speed and disk
|
|||
|
write speed.
|
|||
|
--^systemnetworkusage Shows the current usage of system network
|
|||
|
resources.
|
|||
|
(It shows Network Interface performance counters
|
|||
|
provided by Microsoft Windows).
|
|||
|
Available in Microsoft Windows only.
|
|||
|
--^systemdiskusage Shows the current usage of system physical
|
|||
|
disks.
|
|||
|
(It shows Network Interface performance counters
|
|||
|
provided by Microsoft Windows).
|
|||
|
Available in Microsoft Windows only.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^iostats MYSERVER:8087 --^serveruploadtest --^serverdownloadtest --^nettotalmb=32
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
|||
|
Gets, updates, or finds the issue status in the specified issue tracker.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^get <task_id> <parameter>[ ...]
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^update <task_id> <status> <parameter>[ ...]
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^status ^find <status> <parameter>[ ...]
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker <name> ^connection ^check <parameter>[ ...]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
name Name of the issue tracker to connect with.
|
|||
|
Only Jira is supported at the moment.
|
|||
|
task_id Number of the issue to query or update.
|
|||
|
^status A valid status for an issue in the issue tracker.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Jira parameters (all are mandatory):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^user=<user> The user to authenticate.
|
|||
|
--^password=<password> The password to authenticate.
|
|||
|
--^host=<url> The target url of the issue tracker.
|
|||
|
--^projectkey=<key> The project key of Jira project.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ISSUETRACKER ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^get 11 --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
|||
|
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
|||
|
(Gets the status of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^update 11 "Done" --^user=user@mail.es \
|
|||
|
--^password=pwd --^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
|||
|
(Updates the status to 'Done' of the issue 11 for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker jira ^status ^find "Done" --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
|||
|
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
|||
|
(Gets the task ids whose status is set to 'Done' for the 'PRJ' project.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^issuetracker jira ^connection ^check --^user=user@mail.es --^password=pwd \
|
|||
|
--^host=https://user.atlassian.net --^projectkey=PRJ
|
|||
|
(Checks whether the configuration parameters are valid or not.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LICENSEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Displays license information and license usage.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LICENSEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^licenseinfo | ^li [--^server=<repserverspec>] [--^inactive] [--^active]
|
|||
|
[--^sort=(^name|^status)]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Gets the license info from the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repserver
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
--^inactive Shows only inactive users in the "license usage" section.
|
|||
|
--^active Shows only active users in the "license usage" section.
|
|||
|
--^sort Sorts users by one of the specified sort options:
|
|||
|
'^name' or '^status'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LICENSEINFO ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The information displayed consists of expiration date, activated and
|
|||
|
deactivated users, etc.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^licenseinfo
|
|||
|
cm ^licenseinfo --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^licenseinfo --^sort=^name
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LINKTASK ==
|
|||
|
Links a changeset to a task.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LINKTASK ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^linktask | ^lt <csetspec> <ext_prefix> <task_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
csetspec The full changeset specification to link to a task.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
ext_prefix The extension prefix of the configured issue tracking
|
|||
|
system to work with.
|
|||
|
task_name The task identifier on the issue tracking system.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LINKTASK ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lt ^cs:8@^rep:default@^repserver:localhost:8084 jira PRJ-1
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Shows locks on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list | ^ls [<revspec> [ ...]] [--^server=<server>]
|
|||
|
[--^repository] [--^workingbranch=<brname>] [--^anystatus]
|
|||
|
[--^onlycurrentuser] [--^onlycurrentworkspace]
|
|||
|
[--^ignorecase]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^smartlocks]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
This option will override the default server which
|
|||
|
is retrieved from the current workspace or the
|
|||
|
client.conf file.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
server specs.)
|
|||
|
--^repository Repository specification.
|
|||
|
This option will only list the locks of the specified
|
|||
|
repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
repository specs.)
|
|||
|
--^workingbranch Branch name.
|
|||
|
This option will only list the locks that apply to
|
|||
|
the destination branch of the specified branch.
|
|||
|
--^anystatus Shows locks in any status (Locked or Retained).
|
|||
|
By default, only locks in Locked status are shown.
|
|||
|
--^onlycurrentuser Filters the results showing only the locks performed
|
|||
|
by the current user.
|
|||
|
--^onlycurrentworkspace Filters the results showing only the locks performed
|
|||
|
on the current workspace (matching them by name).
|
|||
|
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths when a serverpath spec
|
|||
|
is used. With this flag, the command will work for
|
|||
|
"/src/foo.c" even if the user writes "/sRc/fOO.c".
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
--^smartlocks Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, shows all the
|
|||
|
smart lock fields. Otherwise, it only shows the legacy locks
|
|||
|
fields. This parameter is needed to avoid breaking
|
|||
|
compatibility with older integrations / plugins that expect
|
|||
|
the old format.
|
|||
|
revspec If one or more are present, this command will display
|
|||
|
one lock line for each specified revision if its
|
|||
|
associated item is locked in the server. Otherwise,
|
|||
|
this command will list all locked items in the default
|
|||
|
server (or the one set with the '--^server' option).
|
|||
|
Use a whitespace to separate the rev specs when using
|
|||
|
more than one.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rev specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOCK_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command will display a list of the currently locked items in the
|
|||
|
default server. It also accepts a list of revision specifications. In this
|
|||
|
case, only the locks belonging to the selected items will be displayed.
|
|||
|
A '--^server=<server>' can be used to set the default server to query.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command shows a line for every lock in the specified server:
|
|||
|
- Repository of the locked item.
|
|||
|
- Item id of the locked item.
|
|||
|
- GUID of the locked item (this is only printed with the --^machinereadable flag).
|
|||
|
- Date of the lock.
|
|||
|
- Destination branch where the lock will be released.
|
|||
|
- Revision id of the item loaded in the destination branch.
|
|||
|
- Holder branch where the lock was performed.
|
|||
|
- Revision id of the item that currently holds the lock.
|
|||
|
- Status of the lock (Locked or Retained)
|
|||
|
- User name who performed the lock.
|
|||
|
- Workspace name where the lock was performed.
|
|||
|
- Path of the locked item (server path format).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
For the --^machinereadable without the --^smartlocks option, the
|
|||
|
printed fields are:
|
|||
|
- GUID of the locked item.
|
|||
|
- User name who performed the lock.
|
|||
|
- Workspace name where the lock was performed.
|
|||
|
- Path of the locked item (server path format).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^repository=repo@myserver:8084 --^anystatus
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^repository=repo@myserver:8084 --^workingbranch=/main/scm21345
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^ls ^serverpath:/src/foo.c#^cs:99@default@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list ^revid:3521@default ^itemid:2381@secondary --^onlycurrentuser
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^dateformat="yy/dd/MM HH:mm:ss"
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^ls --^onlycurrentuser --^onlycurrentworkspace
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" \
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^machinereadable --^smartlocks --^startlineseparator=">" \
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator="<" --^fieldseparator=","
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LISTUSERS ==
|
|||
|
Lists users and groups.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LISTUSERS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> [--^onlyusers] [--^onlygroups]
|
|||
|
[--^filter=<str_filter>]
|
|||
|
cm ^listusers | ^lu <repserverspec> --^group=<group_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^onlyusers Lists only users.
|
|||
|
--^onlygroups Lists only groups.
|
|||
|
--^filter Lists only users and/or groups that matches the
|
|||
|
specified filter.
|
|||
|
--^group Lists only users from a certain group. This option is
|
|||
|
not compatible with ^onlyusers, ^onlygroups, nor ^filter.
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LISTUSERS ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lu localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Lists all users in the server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^listusers localhost:8084 --^onlyusers --^filter=m
|
|||
|
(Lists only the users in the server that contains "m".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^listusers codice@cloud --^group=Administrators
|
|||
|
(Lists only the users in the group Administrators in the 'codice@cloud' org.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCATION ==
|
|||
|
Returns the path of 'cm'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOCATION ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^location
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOCATION ==
|
|||
|
Bear in mind this is related to your environment variables.
|
|||
|
If you have several installations of the client, it will return
|
|||
|
the first one in the path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK ==
|
|||
|
This command allows the user to manage locks.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^list | ^ls
|
|||
|
- ^unlock
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^lock <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^lock <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOCK ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock
|
|||
|
(The '^list' subcommand is the default.)
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^list --^anystatus
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^create /main/task@myrep ^itemid:56@myrep
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOG ==
|
|||
|
Gets info about revisions in changesets.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOG ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log [<csetspec> | <repspec>] [--^from=<csetspec_from>] [--^allbranches]
|
|||
|
[--^ancestors] [--^csformat=<str_format>] [--^itemformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^dateformat=<str_date_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^repositorypaths | --^fullpaths | --^fp]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^from Lists all the changes made in every changeset from the
|
|||
|
changeset specification [csetspec_from] to the
|
|||
|
changeset specification [csetspec].
|
|||
|
The [csetspec_from] changeset is not included in the
|
|||
|
output.
|
|||
|
Ignored when a repository spec is provided.
|
|||
|
--^allbranches Shows information about the changesets created in a
|
|||
|
specified interval, for all the branches where those
|
|||
|
changesets were created.
|
|||
|
--^ancestors Shows information about the reachable changesets by
|
|||
|
following the parent and merge links for the given
|
|||
|
changeset ([csetspec]). If the from changeset
|
|||
|
([csetspec_from]) is provided too, it will be used as
|
|||
|
lower limit for all the paths. Remarks: The changeset
|
|||
|
changes will not be shown when this option is used.
|
|||
|
--^csformat Retrieves the changeset info in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
|||
|
with '--^xml'.
|
|||
|
--^itemformat Retrieves the item info in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
|||
|
with '--^xml'.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Sets the output format to print dates.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
|||
|
cannot be combined with '--^csformat' and '--^itemformat'.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing full workspace paths for files and
|
|||
|
directories when possible.
|
|||
|
--^repositorypaths Prints repository paths (server paths) instead of
|
|||
|
workspace paths. (This option overrides the
|
|||
|
'--^fullpaths' option).
|
|||
|
csetspec Returns all changes made in the specified changeset.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
repspec Returns all changes made in the specified repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOG ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If neither 'csetspec' nor option is specified, the command shows
|
|||
|
information about every changeset created within the last month in every
|
|||
|
branch.
|
|||
|
- If only the option '--^from' is included, the command shows the
|
|||
|
information about every changeset from that specified changeset to the
|
|||
|
last changeset in the branch where the changeset was created.
|
|||
|
- If the option '--^allbranches' appears without an interval, the command
|
|||
|
retrieves the same information as it would do if only 'csetspec' was
|
|||
|
specified.
|
|||
|
- If the '--^from' is used, the output contains information from the
|
|||
|
'csetspec_from'+1 on.
|
|||
|
- The repository used to show the changeset information is the one loaded
|
|||
|
in the path where the command executes on.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string for the items ('--^itemformat') and a
|
|||
|
format string for the changesets ('--^csformat').
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of '--^csformat' are the following:
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
{^changesetid} Changeset number.
|
|||
|
{^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
|
|||
|
{^date} Date of the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^owner} Owner of the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^comment} Comment of the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^items} Items involved in the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^repository} Repository where the changeset exists.
|
|||
|
{^repserver} Server name.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of '--^itemformat' are the following:
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
{^path} Item path.
|
|||
|
{^branch} Branch where the changeset was created.
|
|||
|
{^date} Date of the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^owner} Owner of the changeset.
|
|||
|
{^shortstatus} Prints the short format for the status. See below.
|
|||
|
{^fullstatus} Prints the long format for the status. See below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Short format and its corresponding long format:
|
|||
|
'^A' ^Added
|
|||
|
'^D' ^Deleted
|
|||
|
'^M' ^Moved
|
|||
|
'^C' ^Changed
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These are valid output strings:
|
|||
|
- --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on {^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
|
|||
|
- --^itemformat="{^newline}The item {^path} was changed in the branch {^branch}."
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Date format parameters (--^dateformat):
|
|||
|
To specify the output format in which dates will be printed.
|
|||
|
See the supported formats specified at:
|
|||
|
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/dotnet/standard/base-types/custom-date-and-time-format-strings
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log
|
|||
|
(Shows information about every changeset created in the last month in every
|
|||
|
branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log ^cs:16
|
|||
|
(Shows information about the changes done in the changeset 16 in the branch
|
|||
|
where the changeset was created.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log ^cs:16 --^csformat="{^newline}Changeset {^changesetid} created on \
|
|||
|
{^date};{^tab} changed items: {^items}."
|
|||
|
(Shows the information in the specified format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50
|
|||
|
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
|||
|
from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20 ^cs:50 --^allbranches
|
|||
|
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
|||
|
from the changeset 21 to the changeset 50 in every branch of the
|
|||
|
repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log ^rep:myrep@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Shows information about the changes done in the specified repository.
|
|||
|
No workspace is required to run the command.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^log --^from=^cs:20@^rep:mainRep@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Shows the information about every revision contained in every changeset
|
|||
|
from the changeset 21. No workspace is required to run the command, because
|
|||
|
the full changeset spec was specified.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists the contents of a tree.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls | ^dir [<paths>[ ...]] [--^format=<str_format>] [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
[--^selector[=<selector_format>]] [--^tree=<obj_spec>]
|
|||
|
[-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info. This option cannot be combined
|
|||
|
with '--^xml'.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
|||
|
target.
|
|||
|
--^selector Gets the content from the active workspace selector.
|
|||
|
If selector_format is specified, then lists the
|
|||
|
specified selector.
|
|||
|
This is mostly deprecated since selectors are
|
|||
|
no longer a central part of Unity VCS since 4.x.
|
|||
|
--^tree Lists the tree in the specified changeset or branch.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Lists recursively.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
|||
|
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
paths List of paths to show. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Path can be typed with meta-characters.
|
|||
|
- The list depends on the workspace selector.
|
|||
|
- The output of the command can be formatted specifying a format string.
|
|||
|
- If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are specified, the given
|
|||
|
path must be a server path (a.k.a.: 'cm path'): /dir/file.txt, not a
|
|||
|
workspace path: C:\Users\myuser\mywk\dir\file.txt
|
|||
|
- If no path is provided, the workspace path assumed is the current
|
|||
|
directory. If '--^tree' or '--^selector' options are used, then
|
|||
|
the root path ("/") is assumed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The default format string is:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
"{^size,10} {^date:dd/MM/yyyy} {^date:HH:mm}\
|
|||
|
{^type,-6} {^location,-12} {^checkout,-5} {^name}\
|
|||
|
{^symlinktarget}"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
- {^size}
|
|||
|
- {^formattedsize}
|
|||
|
- {^date}
|
|||
|
- {^type}
|
|||
|
- ^dir: directory,
|
|||
|
- ^txt: text file,
|
|||
|
- ^File: file.
|
|||
|
- {^location} (Example: ^br:branch#cset)
|
|||
|
- {^checkout}
|
|||
|
- {^name}
|
|||
|
- {^changeset}
|
|||
|
- {^path}
|
|||
|
- {^repspec}
|
|||
|
- {^owner}
|
|||
|
- {^revid}
|
|||
|
- {^parentrevid}
|
|||
|
- {^itemid}
|
|||
|
- {^brid}
|
|||
|
- {^repid}
|
|||
|
- {^server}
|
|||
|
- {^symlinktarget}
|
|||
|
- {^hash}
|
|||
|
- {^chmod}
|
|||
|
- {^wkpath} (Path relative to workspace root)
|
|||
|
- {^branch}
|
|||
|
- {^newlocation} (cset@branch)
|
|||
|
- {^guid} (Will take longer to resolve)
|
|||
|
- {^itemguid}
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can customize the '^ls' format setting the PLASTIC_LS_FORMAT environment
|
|||
|
variable.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls
|
|||
|
cm ^ls c:\workspace\src
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls --^format={^name}
|
|||
|
(Only file names.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Displays information about the symlink instead of the target file or
|
|||
|
directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls code --^selector
|
|||
|
(Shows the content of the 'code' subdirectory from the current workspace
|
|||
|
selector.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls /code --^selector="^rep 'myrep' ^path '/' ^branch '/^main'"
|
|||
|
(Shows the content of the '/code' subdirectory on the specified selector.
|
|||
|
Note that the path is specified in server format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls /code --^tree=44@myrep@denver:7070
|
|||
|
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset 44 at repo 'myrep' at server
|
|||
|
'denver:7070'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls /code --^tree=^br:/main/scm13596@myrep@denver:7070
|
|||
|
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at the latest changeset in branch
|
|||
|
'/main/scm13596' at repo 'myrep' at server 'denver:7070'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@myrep@denver:7070
|
|||
|
(Lists the '/code' subdirectory at changeset
|
|||
|
ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77 at repo 'myrep' at server
|
|||
|
'denver:7070'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists the triggers of a given type on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^list | ^ls [<subtype-type>] [--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Lists the triggers on the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
|||
|
types.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the type is not specified, lists all the triggers on the server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{0} Trigger position.
|
|||
|
{1} Trigger name.
|
|||
|
{2} Trigger path.
|
|||
|
{3} Trigger owner.
|
|||
|
{4} Trigger type.
|
|||
|
{5} Trigger filter.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger list after-mklabel
|
|||
|
(Lists all triggers of type 'after-mklabel' on the server configured on the
|
|||
|
client.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Lists all triggers of type 'before-mkbranch' on server 'myserver:8084'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.**
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^manipulateselector | ^ms [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>] --^atdate=<sel_date>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace.
|
|||
|
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^atdate Returns a selector that will recreate the workspace as
|
|||
|
it would have looked at the specified date.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_MANIPULATESELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
|
|||
|
current directory as workspace path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^manipulateselector c:\workspace --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
|||
|
cm ^manipulateselector --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
|||
|
cm ^manipulateselector > mySelector.txt --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
|||
|
cm ^manipulateselector ^wk:build_wk@BUILDER --^atdate=yyyy-MM-ddTHH:mm:ss
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MERGE ==
|
|||
|
Merges a branch with another branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_MERGE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge <source_spec> [--^merge] [--^cherrypicking] [--^forced]
|
|||
|
[--^mergetype=(^onlyone|^onlysrc|^onlydst|^try|^forced)]
|
|||
|
[--^interval-origin=<csetspec> | --^ancestor=<csetspec>]
|
|||
|
[--^keepsource | --^ks] [--^keepdestination | --^kd]
|
|||
|
[--^automaticresolution=<conflict-types>[;...]]
|
|||
|
[--^subtractive] [--^mount] [--^printcontributors]
|
|||
|
[--^noprintoperations] [--^silent]
|
|||
|
[(--^to=<brspec> | --^destination=<brspec>)[--^shelve]]
|
|||
|
[--^no-dst-changes]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | --^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^resolveconflict --^conflict=<index>
|
|||
|
--^resolutionoption=(^src|^dst|(^rename --^resolutioninfo=<strname>))
|
|||
|
--^mergeresultfile=<path> --^solvedconflictsfile=<path>]
|
|||
|
[--^nointeractiveresolution]
|
|||
|
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^merge Performs the merge. Otherwise, prints the
|
|||
|
conflicts found.
|
|||
|
--^cherrypicking Merges the changes included on the source
|
|||
|
changesets. This option is not used if the merge
|
|||
|
source specification is a label.
|
|||
|
--^forced Does not check if the source and destination are
|
|||
|
already connected.
|
|||
|
This option is only available for interval merge
|
|||
|
and cherry picking.
|
|||
|
--^mergetype Type of the merge. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^interval-origin Specifies which changeset is chosen as the
|
|||
|
interval origin, so the merge will only take the
|
|||
|
differences between the source changeset and the
|
|||
|
specified interval origin.
|
|||
|
--^ancestor This is an alias of '--^interval-origin'.
|
|||
|
--^keepsource Accepts all changes from source contributor for
|
|||
|
items with conflicts.
|
|||
|
--^keepdestination Preserves changes from destination contributor
|
|||
|
for items with conflicts.
|
|||
|
--^automaticresolution Used to resolve directory conflicts. This option
|
|||
|
lets you choose whether the source or the
|
|||
|
destination contributor should be automatically
|
|||
|
selected to resolve the conflict.
|
|||
|
Use a semicolon to separate conflict types.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^subtractive Deletes changes introduced by a merge. The
|
|||
|
parameter passed to the command (source_spec) is
|
|||
|
used to specify which is the source to delete
|
|||
|
changes. It must be a changeset. In the case of a
|
|||
|
changeset interval, the '--^interval-origin' must
|
|||
|
be used to define the interval origin. To remove
|
|||
|
a change, the system creates a new checked out
|
|||
|
revision which will have the content of the
|
|||
|
previous one except for the deleted changes.
|
|||
|
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
|||
|
--^printcontributors Prints the contributors (base, source, and
|
|||
|
destination).
|
|||
|
--^noprintoperations Silently resolves merges without showing
|
|||
|
information about the resolution.
|
|||
|
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
|||
|
--^to | --^destination Performs a merge-to operation to the specified
|
|||
|
branch (by entering a branch spec or brspec)
|
|||
|
with full conflict resolution.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
branch specs.)
|
|||
|
A "merge-to" (or workspace-less merge) is a merge
|
|||
|
done in the server side. While normal merges
|
|||
|
happen on a workspace merging "from" a branch,
|
|||
|
label or changeset, a merge-to happens entirely
|
|||
|
on the server. While in normal merges the
|
|||
|
"destination" is the workspace, in "merge-to" a
|
|||
|
destination must be always specified (that's why
|
|||
|
we call it "to").
|
|||
|
Check the following link for more information
|
|||
|
about the "merge to" feature:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/mergeto
|
|||
|
--^shelve Creates a shelve with the changes of the merge
|
|||
|
result (plus merge traceability info) instead of
|
|||
|
creating a new changeset. This option is not
|
|||
|
available when the merge source is a shelve. This
|
|||
|
option is only available for server-side-merge
|
|||
|
(a.k.a. "merge-to"). Hence, the '--^to' and
|
|||
|
'--^merge' options are required.
|
|||
|
--^no-dst-changes Ensures that the destination contributor doesn't
|
|||
|
have changes (the destination changeset is also
|
|||
|
the common ancestor). When there are changes on
|
|||
|
the destination, the merge is not allowed.
|
|||
|
-^c Applies the specified comment to the changeset
|
|||
|
created in the merge operation.
|
|||
|
--^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
|||
|
changeset created in the merge operation.
|
|||
|
--^resolveconflict (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
|||
|
Used to solve a directory conflict.
|
|||
|
--^conflict Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
the index of the conflict to solve starting at 1.
|
|||
|
--^resolutionoption Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, indicates
|
|||
|
the type of the conflict resolution. Use one of
|
|||
|
the following options: '^src', '^dst', '^rename'.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^resolutioninfo Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, provides
|
|||
|
the name to use when the '--^resolutionoption'
|
|||
|
option is 'rename'.
|
|||
|
--^mergeresultfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
|
|||
|
into a file the information of the merge result
|
|||
|
between different calls .The specified path will
|
|||
|
be created during the first call and updated on
|
|||
|
each next call.
|
|||
|
--^solvedconflictsfile Used with the '--^resolveconflict' flag, outputs
|
|||
|
into a file the information of the conflicts
|
|||
|
solved between different calls. The specified
|
|||
|
path will be created during the first call and
|
|||
|
updated on each next call.
|
|||
|
--^nointeractiveresolution (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
|||
|
Avoids prompting the user for manual conflict.
|
|||
|
This way, a directory conflict won't be solved.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable (Mainly used by plugins. See Remarks for more info.)
|
|||
|
Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
|||
|
cannot be combined with '--^format' nor '--^resolveconflict'.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should start. (Default: empty string.)
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should end. (Default: empty string.)
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the fields should be separated. (Default:
|
|||
|
whitespace.)
|
|||
|
source_spec Specification of the source object to merge from
|
|||
|
(See Remarks for more info.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_MERGE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is used to merge changes between two branches or between a
|
|||
|
label and a branch. The destination of the merge must be always a branch.
|
|||
|
The merge source is specified as an argument.
|
|||
|
Destination is the current content of the workspace.
|
|||
|
For example, to display the elements that will be merged from branch
|
|||
|
task001 to the main branch, the selector must point to the main branch,
|
|||
|
the workspace must be updated, and then:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/task001
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To really perform the merge, '--^merge' option is added:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To define the merge source, the following specs can be used:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Branch specification (brspec):
|
|||
|
- cm merge [^br:/]br_name
|
|||
|
- Example: cm merge ^br:/main/task001
|
|||
|
(Merges from the last changeset on this branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Label specification (lbspec):
|
|||
|
- cm merge ^lb:lb_name
|
|||
|
- Example: cm merge ^lb:BL001
|
|||
|
(Merges from the labeled changeset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Changeset specification (csetspec):
|
|||
|
- cm merge ^cs:cs_number
|
|||
|
- Example: cm merge ^cs:25
|
|||
|
(Merges from the given changeset content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Shelve specification (shspec):
|
|||
|
- cm merge ^sh:shelve_number
|
|||
|
- Example: cm merge ^sh:2
|
|||
|
(Merges from the given shelve content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To automatically resolve directory conflicts, use '--^automaticresolution'
|
|||
|
option and specify the type of conflict followed by the contributor
|
|||
|
(source or destination) that must be selected during the merge operation.
|
|||
|
(Separate each "type of conflict"-"contributor" pair by a semicolon (;).)
|
|||
|
For example:
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^cs:2634 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^eviltwin-src;^changedelete-src
|
|||
|
(The merge operation from changeset 2634 resolves the "^eviltwin" and
|
|||
|
"^changedelete" conflicts by keeping the source ("-^src") contributor in
|
|||
|
both cases.)
|
|||
|
- A "-^src" suffix after a conflict type tells the merge command to keep the
|
|||
|
source contributor changes.
|
|||
|
- A "-^dst" suffix will keep the destination contributor changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This is the list of conflict types the merge command supports:
|
|||
|
- ^movedeviltwin
|
|||
|
- ^eviltwin
|
|||
|
- ^changedelete
|
|||
|
- ^deletechange
|
|||
|
- ^movedelete"
|
|||
|
- ^deletemove
|
|||
|
- ^loadedtwice
|
|||
|
- ^addmove
|
|||
|
- ^moveadd
|
|||
|
- ^divergentmove
|
|||
|
- ^cyclemove
|
|||
|
- ^all
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The "^all" value overrides the other options. In the following example,
|
|||
|
"^eviltwin-dst" will be ignored:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task062 --^merge --^automaticresolution=^all-src;^eviltwin-dst
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Check the following link to learn more about merge conflicts:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/directorymerges
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These are the options for '--^mergetype':
|
|||
|
^onlyone Automatic merge if only one contributor modified the item.
|
|||
|
^onlysrc Automatic merge if only source contributor modified the item.
|
|||
|
^onlydst Automatic merge if only destination contributor modified the item.
|
|||
|
^try Automatic merge if only one contributor has modified the
|
|||
|
conflictive piece of code (each conflict).
|
|||
|
^forced Always try to solve all non-automatic conflicts.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These are the options that are mainly used by plugins and integrations:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- '--^resolveconflict' to solve a directory conflict. You also have to
|
|||
|
use the following options:
|
|||
|
- '--^conflict' is the index of the conflict that you want to
|
|||
|
solve, starting at 1.
|
|||
|
- '--^resolutionoption' indicates the conflict resolution to
|
|||
|
use. This can be:
|
|||
|
- '^src' to keep the source change and discard the
|
|||
|
destination change
|
|||
|
- '^dst' to keep the destination change and discard the
|
|||
|
source change
|
|||
|
- '^rename' (only if the conflict type supports this
|
|||
|
resolution), to rename the destination to the given name
|
|||
|
provided with the '--^resolutioninfo' option.
|
|||
|
- '--^resolutioninfo' to provide the name to use on a
|
|||
|
'^rename' resolution
|
|||
|
- '--^mergeresultfile' and '--^solvedconflictsfile', both used to
|
|||
|
store the merge info between different calls.
|
|||
|
- '--^nointeractiveresolution' indicates the merge to not ask the user for
|
|||
|
manual conflict resolution.
|
|||
|
- '--^machinereadable' and '--^startlineseparator', '--^endlineseparator',
|
|||
|
'--^fieldseparator' options to print the output on a machine-readable
|
|||
|
way (easier-to-parse).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Specification of the source:
|
|||
|
Branch specification '[^br:/]br_name'
|
|||
|
Label specification '^lb:lb_name'
|
|||
|
Changeset specification '^cs:cs_number'
|
|||
|
Shelve specification '^sh:shelve_number'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/task001
|
|||
|
(Does not merge, just prints items to be merged.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/task001 --^merge
|
|||
|
(Does merge from branch 'task001'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^cs:5 --^merge --^cherrypicking --^interval-origin=^cs:2
|
|||
|
(Cherry pick from the changeset interval (2,5].)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^cs:8 --^merge --^subtractive --^keepdestination
|
|||
|
(Subtractive merge from changeset 8, keeping destination changes for those
|
|||
|
elements with conflicts.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge -^c="Integrated new UI"
|
|||
|
(Does server-side merge, a.k.a. merge-to, from branch 'task001' to branch
|
|||
|
'main' and sets a comment.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^br:/main/task001 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^shelve
|
|||
|
(Does server-side merge from branch 'task001' to branch 'main' and leaves
|
|||
|
the result on a shelve.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge ^sh:2 --^to=^br:/main --^merge --^no-dst-changes
|
|||
|
(Applies the shelve 2 into 'main' only if it was created from the current
|
|||
|
'main' head')
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^merge --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=start@_@line \
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator=new@_@line --^fieldseparator=def#_#sep \
|
|||
|
--^mergeresultfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6C.tmp \
|
|||
|
--^solvedconflictsfile=C:\Users\Borja\AppData\Local\Temp\2tmp4D6D.tmp \
|
|||
|
--^resolveconflict --^conflict=1 --^resolutionoption=rename \
|
|||
|
--^resolutioninfo=bin_dst ^br:/main/task --^merge
|
|||
|
(Example for plugins and integrations)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^create | ^mk <att_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
att_name Attribute name
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^create status
|
|||
|
(Creates the attribute 'status'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^att ^mk integrated
|
|||
|
(Creates the attribute 'integrated'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage branches.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^rename
|
|||
|
- ^history
|
|||
|
- ^showmain
|
|||
|
- ^showmerges
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^branch <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^branch <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch /main/scm21345
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^create /main/scm21345
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^delete /main/scm21345
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^rename /main/scm21345 scm21346
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^history /main/scm21345
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmain
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br [^create | ^mk] <brspec>
|
|||
|
[--^changeset=<csetspec> | --^label=<lbspec>]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^changeset Changeset used as starting point for the new branch.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about cset specs.)
|
|||
|
--^label Label used as starting point for the new branch.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
|
|||
|
-^c Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
|
|||
|
specified text.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Fills in the comment field of the new branch with the
|
|||
|
contents of the specified file.
|
|||
|
brspec The new branch name or spec.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To create a top-level branch, specify the name without any hierarchy.
|
|||
|
For example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br /dev
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no optional parameter '--^changeset' is specified, the base of the new
|
|||
|
branch will be the last changeset on the parent branch. If the new branch
|
|||
|
is a top-level branch, the base changeset used will be cset 0.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can specify a comment using either the '-^c' or the '-^m' switches:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch /main/task001 -^c="This is the comment"
|
|||
|
cm ^branch /main/task001 -^m "This is the comment"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch task001
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^create task001
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^mk task001
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^mk task001
|
|||
|
(All of the examples above, create a top-level 'task001' branch in the
|
|||
|
repository of the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^br:/task001/task002@
|
|||
|
(Creates 'task002' branch as child of 'task001'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br /main/task001@myrep@myserver:8084 -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
(Creates 'task001' branch as child of 'main' in repository
|
|||
|
'myrep@myserver:8084' with comment 'my comment'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^br:/main/task001 --^changeset=2837 -^commentsfile=commenttask001.txt
|
|||
|
(Creates the 'task001' branch as child of 'main' with base 'changeset=2837',
|
|||
|
and applies the comment in 'commenttask001.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes one or more branches.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br ^delete | ^rm <brspec>[ ...]
|
|||
|
[--^delete-changesets]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
brspec Branch to delete. Use a whitespace to separate branches.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^delete-changesets For non-emtpy branches, first deletes the changesets
|
|||
|
within the branch, then deletes the branch.
|
|||
|
The operation will fail in the following scenarios:
|
|||
|
- The branch includes the changeset zero (the main
|
|||
|
branch in your repository).
|
|||
|
- One or more changesets in the branch have a label
|
|||
|
pointing to them.
|
|||
|
- One or more shelvesets where created from changesets
|
|||
|
in the branch.
|
|||
|
- The branch has child branches (even if the child
|
|||
|
branch is empty).
|
|||
|
- One or more changesets in the branch are the source
|
|||
|
of a merge, and the destination is not included in
|
|||
|
the branch being deleted.
|
|||
|
The operation is atomic. Either all or none of the
|
|||
|
changesets in the branch are removed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command deletes one or more branches.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^delete /main/task001
|
|||
|
(Deletes the branch with name 'task001' that is a child of 'main' in the
|
|||
|
repository of the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^rm main/task002 /main/task012@reptest@myserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Deletes branches '/main/task002' in the repository of the current workspace
|
|||
|
and '/main/task012' in the repository 'reptest@myserver:8084'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^rm main/task002 --delete-changesets
|
|||
|
(Deletes branch '/main/task002' and all of its changesets at once).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Renames a branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br ^rename <brspec> <new_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
brspec Branch to rename.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
new_name New name for the branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command renames a branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^rename /main/task0 task1
|
|||
|
(Renames branch '/main/task0' to '/main/task1'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^rename ^br:/main@reptest@server2:8084 secondary
|
|||
|
(Renames the 'main' branch of repository 'reptest' to 'secondary'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Shows the history of a branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br ^history <brspec> [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
brspec The branch specification to obtain the history.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^history ^br:/main/scm001@myrepository@myserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Displays the history of '/main/scm001' branch of 'myrepository' repository
|
|||
|
on 'myserver' server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^history main --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^machinereadable
|
|||
|
(Displays the history of the 'main' branch of the current repository,
|
|||
|
with a given date format, and in an easy-to-parse format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
|||
|
Shows the main branch of a repository. The main branch of your repository is '/main' by default.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br ^showmain [<repspec>] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<format_str>] [--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the encoding to use in the output,
|
|||
|
i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
repspec The repository specification where to show the main
|
|||
|
branch. If no repspec is specified, the command will show
|
|||
|
the main branch for the repository of the current
|
|||
|
workspace.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMAIN ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command shows the main branch of a repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^id} Branch id.
|
|||
|
{^comment} Comment.
|
|||
|
{^date} Date.
|
|||
|
{^name} Name.
|
|||
|
{^owner} Owner.
|
|||
|
{^parent} Parent branch name.
|
|||
|
{^repository} Repository.
|
|||
|
{^repname} Repository name.
|
|||
|
{^repserver} Server.
|
|||
|
{^changeset} Head changeset of the branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmain
|
|||
|
(Displays the main branch for the repository of the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmain repo@server:8084
|
|||
|
(Displays the main branch for the repository 'repo' in server
|
|||
|
'server:8084'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^showmain --^dateformat="yyyy, dd MMMM" --^encoding=utf-8
|
|||
|
(Displays the main branch of the repository with a given date format,
|
|||
|
and the output is in utf-8.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^br ^showmain --^format="{^id} - {^name}"
|
|||
|
(Displays the main branch of the repository, printing only its id and name.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
|||
|
Shows branches pending to be merged.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch | ^br ^showmerges <item_path>[ ...]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<format_str>]
|
|||
|
[--^dateformat=<date_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^dateformat Format used to output dates.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_BRANCH_SHOWMERGES ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
- {^id} Branch id.
|
|||
|
- {^comment} Comment.
|
|||
|
- {^date} Date.
|
|||
|
- {^name} Name.
|
|||
|
- {^owner} Owner.
|
|||
|
- {^parent} Parent branch name.
|
|||
|
- {^parentid} Parent branch id.
|
|||
|
- {^repid} Repository id.
|
|||
|
- {^repository} Repository.
|
|||
|
- {^repname} Repository name.
|
|||
|
- {^repserver} Repository server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt
|
|||
|
(Displays branches involved in the pending merge of 'file.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^branch ^showmerges file.txt --^format="{^date} {^name}" --^dateformat="ddMMyy"
|
|||
|
(Displays branches involved in the merge, printing only the date and the
|
|||
|
name, with a given date format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage repositories.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^list | ^ls
|
|||
|
- ^rename
|
|||
|
- ^add
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^repository <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^repository <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^list
|
|||
|
cm ^repository newrepo
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^create newrepo
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^rename oldname newname
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^add C:\repo\
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a repository on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo <rep_name>
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo <repserverspec> <rep_name>[ ...]
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo [^create | ^mk] <rep_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
rep_name Name or names of the new repository or repositories.
|
|||
|
Use a whitespace to separate repository names.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository MyRep
|
|||
|
cm ^repo 192.168.1.140:8087 Rep01 Rep01/ModuleA Rep01/ModuleB
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^create Rep01
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^mk list
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a repository from a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo ^delete | ^rm <repspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repspec Repository specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Deletes a repository from the repository server.
|
|||
|
The data is not removed from the database backend, but unplugged
|
|||
|
so that it will not be accessible anymore.
|
|||
|
(Data can be reconnected afterwards, see 'cm ^repository ^add'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^delete myrepository@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^rm myrepository@myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^rm myrepository
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists the repositories on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo [^list | ^ls] [<repserverspec>] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repserverspec Repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about rep server
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^repid} | {0} Repository identifier.
|
|||
|
{^repname} | {1} Repository name.
|
|||
|
{^repserver} | {2} Server name.
|
|||
|
{^repowner} | {3} Repository owner.
|
|||
|
{^repguid} | {4} Unique identifier of the repository.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the format parameter value is '^TABLE', the output will be printed
|
|||
|
using a table format with the {^repid}, {^repname} and {^repserver} fields.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository
|
|||
|
(Lists all repositories.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^list localhost:8084 --^format="{1, -20} {3}"
|
|||
|
(Writes the repository name in 20 spaces, aligned to left, then a blank,
|
|||
|
and then the repository owner.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^ls localhost:8084 --^format="{^repname, -20} {^repowner}"
|
|||
|
(Writes the same as the previous example.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^ls localhost:8084 --^format=^TABLE
|
|||
|
(Writes the list of repositories using a table format with the following
|
|||
|
fields: repository id, repository name, and repository server name.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Renames a repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo ^rename [<repspec>] <new_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
repspec Repository to be renamed.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specifications.)
|
|||
|
new_name New name for the repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command renames a repository.
|
|||
|
If no repspec is specified, current repository will be assumed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^rename development
|
|||
|
(The current repository will be renamed to 'development'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^rename ^rep:default@SERVER:8084 development
|
|||
|
(The 'default' repository on 'SERVER' will be renamed to 'development'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Connects an existing repository by adding its database.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository | ^repo ^add <db_file> <rep_name> <repserverspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
db_file The name of the database file on the database backend.
|
|||
|
rep_name The name of the repository.
|
|||
|
repserverspec The repository server specification.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
server specifications.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REPOSITORY_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reconnects an existing repository database to the server. This command is
|
|||
|
useful to move a repository from one server to another, or to restore an
|
|||
|
archived repository after using the 'cm ^repository ^delete' command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^add rep_27 myrepository myserver:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new trigger on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^create | ^mk <subtype-type> <new_name> <script_path>
|
|||
|
[--^position=<new_position>]
|
|||
|
[--^filter=<str_filter>]
|
|||
|
[--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^position New position of the specified trigger.
|
|||
|
This position must not be in use by another trigger of
|
|||
|
the same type.
|
|||
|
--^filter Checks only items that matches the specified filter.
|
|||
|
--^server Creates the trigger on the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about repository server specifications.)
|
|||
|
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger types.)
|
|||
|
new_name Name of the new trigger.
|
|||
|
script_path Disk path on the server where the script to execute is
|
|||
|
located. If the command line starts with "^webtrigger ",
|
|||
|
the trigger will be considered as a web trigger. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Web triggers: A web trigger is created by typing "^webtrigger <target-uri>"
|
|||
|
as the trigger command. In this case, the trigger will execute a POST query
|
|||
|
against the specified URI -where the request body contains a JSON
|
|||
|
dictionary with the trigger environment variables- and a fixed INPUT key
|
|||
|
pointing to an array of strings.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^create ^after-setselector "BackupMgr" "/path/to/script" --^position=4
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^mk ^after-mklabel Log "/path/to/script" --^filter="^rep:myRep,LB*"
|
|||
|
(This trigger will be executed only if the label name starts with 'LB'
|
|||
|
and it is being created in a repository called 'myRep'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^mk ^after-checkin NotifyTeam "^webtrigger http://myserver.org/api"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Moves or renames a file or directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^errorformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
src_path Source item path.
|
|||
|
dst_path Destination item path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
|
|||
|
Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
|
|||
|
directory. In the first case, the file is renamed; otherwise, the item
|
|||
|
is moved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The item to move or rename must exist.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Format:
|
|||
|
{0} Source path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
|
|||
|
{1} Destination path (both for '--^format' and '--^errorformat')
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^move file.txt file.old
|
|||
|
(Renames the item.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^mv .\file.old .\oldFiles
|
|||
|
(Moves 'file.old' to 'oldFiles'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^move .\src .\src2
|
|||
|
(Renames a directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage labels.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label | ^lb <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^rename
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^label <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^label <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LABEL ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label myNewLabel ^cs:42
|
|||
|
('^create' command is optional.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^rename myNewLabel newLabelName
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^delete newLabelName
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Applies a label to a changeset and creates the label if required.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label [^create] <lbspec> [<csetspec> | <wk_path>]
|
|||
|
[--^allxlinkedrepositories]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^allxlinkedrepositories Creates the new label in all Xlinked repositories.
|
|||
|
-^c Applies the specified comment to the new label.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the
|
|||
|
new label.
|
|||
|
lbspec The new label name.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
csetspec Name or full specification of the changeset to label.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace to label. (The changeset that the
|
|||
|
workspace is pointing will be labeled.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^create ^lb:BL001 ^cs:1203 -^commentsfile=commentlb001.txt
|
|||
|
(Creates label 'BL001' attached to changeset 1203, and applies the comment
|
|||
|
in the 'commentlb001.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label BL002 ^cs:1203 -^c="first release"
|
|||
|
(Creates label 'BL002', with a comment, and attached to changeset 1203.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes one or more labels.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^delete <lbspec>[ ...]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
lbspec Label to delete. Use a whitespace to separate labels.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command deletes one or more labels.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001
|
|||
|
(Deletes the label 'BL001'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^delete ^lb:BL001 ^lb:BL002@reptest@server2:8084
|
|||
|
(Deletes the labels 'BL001' and 'BL002'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Renames a label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^rename <lbspec> <new_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
lbspec Label to rename.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
|
|||
|
new_name New name for the label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LABEL_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command renames a label.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^label ^rename ^lb:BL001 BL002
|
|||
|
(Renames the label 'BL001' to 'BL002'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
|||
|
Describes how to write object specs.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^objectspec
|
|||
|
(To get all the information about how to build object specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_OBJECTSPEC ==
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Several Unity VCS commands expect 'object specs' as input to refer to a
|
|||
|
given object (typically a branch, changeset, repository, etc).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This documentation describes the different "specs" available and how to
|
|||
|
build them.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Each spec type begins with a unique tag, for example "^rep:" or "^cs:". The tag
|
|||
|
must be specified for commands that take a general object spec, for example
|
|||
|
"cm ^setowner object_spec", but can often be omitted for commands that take only
|
|||
|
a single type of spec, for example, "cm ^getfile revision_spec".
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Repository server spec (repserverspec):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^repserver:name:port
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^list ^repserver:skull:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^repo ^list skull:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Side note:
|
|||
|
We call it 'repository server spec', instead of just 'server spec' for
|
|||
|
historical reasons. Long ago, we had separate workspace and repository
|
|||
|
servers, and the naming survived.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Repository spec (repspec):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^rep:rep_name@[repserverspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^showowner ^rep:codice@localhost:6060
|
|||
|
(Here the "^rep:" is required because ^showowner admits not only repos
|
|||
|
but also other types of objects. So it needs the user to indicate the
|
|||
|
object type.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Branch spec (brspec):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are different types of branch specs:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^br:[/]br_name[@repspec]
|
|||
|
- ^br:^brguid:branch_guid[@repspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:/main@^rep:plastic@^repserver:skull:9095
|
|||
|
(In this case "^br:", "^rep" and "^repserver" are not needed, so the
|
|||
|
command admits a much shorter form:
|
|||
|
"cm ^switch main@plastic@skull:9095".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revisions "^where ^branch='^br:/main/task001'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:^brguid:68846cdd-6a46-458c-a47f-52454cc150d9@plastic@skull:9095
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^parent='^brguid:68846cdd-6a46-458c-a47f-52454cc150d9'"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remark:
|
|||
|
The initial '/' on the branch is not mandatory. We used to specify all
|
|||
|
our branches as /main, /main/task001, and so on. But now, we prefer the
|
|||
|
shorter form main, main/task001 which makes commands more compact.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The guid spec is not valid for commands that needs the full branch name
|
|||
|
(such as "cm ^create ^branch").
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Changeset spec (csetspec):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^cs:cs_number|cs_guid[@repspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The number or GUID of the changeset can be specified.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^ls /code --^tree=ae1390ed-7ce9-4ec3-a155-e5a61de0dc77@code@skull:7070
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Label spec (labelspec):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^lb:lb_name[@repspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE2.0
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^lb:RELEASE1.4@myrep@MYSERVER:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Revision spec:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are different types of rev specs:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^rev: item_path[#(brspec|csetspec|labelspec)]
|
|||
|
- ^rev: ^serverpath:item_path#(brspec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
|
|||
|
- ^rev: ^revid:rev_id[@rep_spec]
|
|||
|
- ^rev: ^itemid:item_id#(br_spec|cset_spec|lb_spec)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:19 ^rev:readme.txt#^cs:20
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^cs:19@myrepo \
|
|||
|
^serverpath:/doc/readme.txt#^br:/main@myrepo@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^cat ^revid:1230@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Item spec:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are different types of item specs:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^item: item_path
|
|||
|
- ^item: ^itemid:item_id[@rep_spec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^item:audio.wav
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:1234@^rep:myrep@^repserver:myserver:8084
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Attribute spec:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^att:att_name[@repspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:merged@code@doe:8084 ^cs:25@code@doe:8084 done
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Shelve spec:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^sh:sh_number[@repspec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^diff ^sh:2 ^sh:4
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Workspace specs:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^wk:name@clientmachine
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Rarely used, since they only apply to workspace related commands. Useful to
|
|||
|
specify the workspace by name and machine instead of path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^showselector ^wk:codebase@modok
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Side note:
|
|||
|
These specs come from the old days of Plastic SCM 2.x where 'workspace
|
|||
|
servers' existed as a way to store workspace metadata in a centralized
|
|||
|
way. Were deprecated due to performance issues.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL ==
|
|||
|
Runs commands in a partial workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^configure
|
|||
|
- ^add
|
|||
|
- ^undo
|
|||
|
- ^checkout | ^co
|
|||
|
- ^undocheckout | ^unco
|
|||
|
- ^checkin | ^ci
|
|||
|
- ^move | ^mv
|
|||
|
- ^remove | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^switch | ^stb
|
|||
|
- ^update | ^upd
|
|||
|
- ^shelveset | ^shelve
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^partial <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^partial <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure +/background-blue.png
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update landscape-1024.png
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin eyes-green.png eyes-black.png
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Adds an item to version control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^silent] [--^parents]
|
|||
|
[--^ignorefailed] [--^skipcontentcheck] <item_path>[ ...]
|
|||
|
[--^format=<str-format>] [--^errorformat=<str-format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Adds items recursively.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^parents Includes the parent directories of the items specified
|
|||
|
in the operation.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be added, the add operation will
|
|||
|
continue without it. Note: If a directory cannot be
|
|||
|
added, its content is not added.
|
|||
|
--^skipcontentcheck When the extension is not enough to set the file as
|
|||
|
text or binary, it will be set as binary by default
|
|||
|
instead of checking the content to detect the type.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. Check
|
|||
|
the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
|||
|
format. Check the examples for more information.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to add. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate paths.
|
|||
|
Use * to add all the contents of the current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_ADD ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements to add items:
|
|||
|
- The parent directory of the item to add must be previously added.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add pic1.png pic2.png
|
|||
|
(Adds 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add c:\workspace\picture.png
|
|||
|
(Adds 'picture.png' item in path 'c:\workspace'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add -^R c:\workspace\src
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds 'src'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add --^parents samples\design01.png
|
|||
|
(Adds 'design01.png' file and 'samples' parent folder.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add -^R *
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add -^R * --^format="ADD {0}" --^errorformat="ERR {0}"
|
|||
|
(Recursively adds all the contents of the current directory, printing
|
|||
|
'^ADD <item>' for successfully added files, and '^ERR <item>' for items that
|
|||
|
could not be added.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Stores changes in the repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin | ^ci [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^all | -^a] [--^applychanged] [--^keeplock]
|
|||
|
[--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
|
|||
|
checkin operation.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
|
|||
|
changeset created in the checkin operation.
|
|||
|
--^all | -^a Includes also the items changed, moved, and deleted
|
|||
|
locally on the specified paths.
|
|||
|
--^applychanged Applies the checkin operation to the changed items
|
|||
|
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
|||
|
items.
|
|||
|
--^private Private items detected in the workspace are also
|
|||
|
included.
|
|||
|
--^keeplock Keeps the lock of the locked items after the checkin
|
|||
|
operation.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the checkin operation to the symlink and not to
|
|||
|
the target.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock,
|
|||
|
a.k.a. exclusive checkout, cannot be adquired or
|
|||
|
because local changes are in conflict with the server
|
|||
|
changes) are discarded and the checkin operation
|
|||
|
continues without them.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to checkin. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use . to apply checkin to current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKIN ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If <item_path> is not specified, the checkin will involve all the
|
|||
|
pending changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
- The checkin operation always applies recursively from the given path.
|
|||
|
- To checkin an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out.
|
|||
|
- If the item is changed but not checked out, the '--^applychanged' flag
|
|||
|
is not necessary unless <item_path> is a directory or it contains
|
|||
|
wildcards ('*').
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Revision content should be different from previous revision in order to be
|
|||
|
checked in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^checkin' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
|||
|
single dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to checkin.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^partial ^checkin --^all -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, checkins all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin figure.png landscape.png
|
|||
|
(Applies the checkin to 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
|||
|
(Applies checkin to current directory and sets the comment from the
|
|||
|
'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^ci background.png -^c="my comment" --^keeplock
|
|||
|
(Applies the checkin to 'background.png', includes a comment, and keeps the
|
|||
|
lock.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin --^applychanged
|
|||
|
(Applies the checkin to all pending changes in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Applies the checkin to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkin . --^ignorefailed
|
|||
|
(Applies checkin to current directory, ignoring the changes that cannot be
|
|||
|
applied.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Marks files as ready to modify.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkout | ^co [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^resultformat=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to checkout. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths.
|
|||
|
Use . to apply checkout to current directory.
|
|||
|
--^resultformat Retrieves the output result message in a specific
|
|||
|
format.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed If an item cannot be locked (the exclusive checkout
|
|||
|
cannot be performed), the checkout operation will
|
|||
|
continue without it.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To checkout an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If locks are configured on the server (lock.conf exists), then each time
|
|||
|
a checkout on a path happens, Unity VCS checks if it meets any of the rules
|
|||
|
and if so, the path will be in exclusive checkout (locked) so that none can
|
|||
|
simultaneously checkout.
|
|||
|
You can get all the locks in the server by using 'cm ^lock ^list'.
|
|||
|
Check the Administrator Guide to learn how locking works:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/download/help/locking
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkout pic1.png pic2.png
|
|||
|
(Checkouts 'pic1.png' and 'pic2.png' files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^co *.png
|
|||
|
(Checkouts all png files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkout .
|
|||
|
(Checkouts current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^checkout -^R c:\workspace\src
|
|||
|
(Recursively checkouts 'src' folder.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
|||
|
Allows you to configure your workspace by loading or unloading items from it.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
[--^ignorecase] [--^restorefulldirs]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the process. Incorrect paths
|
|||
|
will not cause the command to stop.
|
|||
|
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, '^configure'
|
|||
|
will work for "/Data/Textures" even if the user writes
|
|||
|
"/data/teXtures".
|
|||
|
--^restorefulldirs Resets an invalid directory configuration (happens when
|
|||
|
a non-partial operation is run on a partial workspace).
|
|||
|
The directories in this list will be fully configured
|
|||
|
(full check) which means they will automatically
|
|||
|
download new content during the update.
|
|||
|
This operation does not download any files, just
|
|||
|
restores the directory configuration on partial
|
|||
|
workspaces.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
|||
|
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Paths have to start with "/".
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_CONFIGURE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure +/landscape_grey.png
|
|||
|
(Loads 'landscape_grey.png' item.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure -/landscape_black.png
|
|||
|
(Unloads 'landscape_black.png' item.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure +/soft -/soft/soft-black.png
|
|||
|
(Loads all 'soft' directory children items except 'soft-black.png'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure -/
|
|||
|
(Unloads the whole workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure -/ +/
|
|||
|
(Loads the whole workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure -/figure-64.png --^ignorefailed
|
|||
|
(Unloads 'figure-64.png' item even if it was already unloaded.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure +/ --^restorefulldirs
|
|||
|
(Sets all directories to automatically download the new content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^configure +/src/lib --^restorefulldirs
|
|||
|
(Sets only '/src/lib' and its subdirectories to automatically download the
|
|||
|
new content.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Moves or renames a file or directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^move | ^mv <src_path> <dst_path> [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
src_path Source item path.
|
|||
|
dst_path Destination item path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command moves or renames an item in the repository.
|
|||
|
Changes are done in the local filesystem too.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the source path is a file, the destination path can be a file or a
|
|||
|
directory. In the first case, the file will be renamed; otherwise, the item
|
|||
|
will be moved.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If source path is a directory, the destination path must be a directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The item to move or rename must exist.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Format:
|
|||
|
{0} Source path.
|
|||
|
{1} Destination path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^move file.png file-blue.png
|
|||
|
(Renames the item.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^mv .\file-blue.png .\blueFiles
|
|||
|
(Moves 'file-blue.png' to 'blueFiles'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^move .\design .\marketing
|
|||
|
(Renames a directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a file or directory from version control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^nodisk]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on disk.
|
|||
|
item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to
|
|||
|
specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
|
|||
|
directory in the source code control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^remove src
|
|||
|
(Removes 'src'. If 'src' is a directory, this is the same that:
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^remove -^R src.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^remove c:\workspace\pic01.png --^nodisk
|
|||
|
(Removes 'pic01.png' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage partial shelvesets.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^apply
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply sh:3
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete sh:5
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Shelves chosen pending changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset | ^shelve ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^applychanged] [--^symlink] [--^ignorefailed]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^c Specifies a comment to the changeset created in the
|
|||
|
shelve operation.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment from the specified file to the
|
|||
|
changeset created in the shelve operation.
|
|||
|
--^applychanged Applies the shelve operation to the changed items
|
|||
|
detected in the workspace along with the checked out
|
|||
|
items.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the shelve operation to the symlink and not to
|
|||
|
the target.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed Any changes that cannot be applied (because the lock
|
|||
|
(a.k.a. exclusive checkout) cannot be adquired or
|
|||
|
because local changes are in conflict with the server
|
|||
|
changes) are discarded and the shelve operation
|
|||
|
continues without them.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies how
|
|||
|
the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to shelve. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use . to apply shelve to current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items
|
|||
|
inside the repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
|
|||
|
checkin the files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
|
|||
|
include all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from
|
|||
|
the given path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^shelveset ^create' operation is the default, which means that,
|
|||
|
if no other operation is defined, the command will try to perform a creation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out or changed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset figure.png landscape.png
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset with 'figure.png' and 'landscape.png' checked-out files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset . -^commentsfile=mycomment.txt
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory
|
|||
|
and sets the comment from the 'mycomment.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelve background.png -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset with 'background.png', includes a comment.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset --^applychanged
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset all pending changes in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset with the symlink file and not the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset . --^ignorefailed
|
|||
|
(Creates a new shelveset with every checked-out file in current directory,
|
|||
|
ignoring (skipping) the changes that cannot be applied.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
Applies a stored shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods:
|
|||
|
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
|||
|
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Applies a stored shelve.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Sets a branch as the working branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch <branch_spec> [--^report | --^silent] [--^workspace=<path>]
|
|||
|
[--^noinput]
|
|||
|
(Sets the working branch and updates the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch <branch_spec> --^configure <+|-path>[ ...] [--^silent]
|
|||
|
[--^ignorefailed] [--^ignorecase] [--^workspace=<path>]
|
|||
|
(Sets the working branch and runs a workspace configuration like the 'cm
|
|||
|
^partial ^configure' command does.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
|
|||
|
is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
|
|||
|
This option only works when the '--^configure' option
|
|||
|
is not specified.
|
|||
|
--^configure Configures (loads / unloads items) the workspace
|
|||
|
after updating the working branch. Check 'cm ^partial
|
|||
|
^configure --^help' to learn how to specify the paths
|
|||
|
to configure.
|
|||
|
--^ignorefailed Skips all errors during the configuration process.
|
|||
|
Incorrect paths will not cause the command to stop.
|
|||
|
--^ignorecase Ignores casing on the paths. With this flag, option
|
|||
|
'--^configure' works for "/Data/Textures" even if the user
|
|||
|
writes "/data/teXtures".
|
|||
|
--^noinput Skips the interactive question to continue the
|
|||
|
operation shelving the pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^workspace=path Path where the workspace is located.
|
|||
|
branch_spec Branch specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
|||
|
more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
path Paths to be loaded or unloaded. Use double quotes (" ")
|
|||
|
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate paths. Paths must start with "/".
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to update the working branch. After updating the
|
|||
|
branch, the command updates the workspace to the new branch as the
|
|||
|
'cm ^partial ^update' command would do. However, if the '--^configure' option is
|
|||
|
specified, the command allows to configure the workspace using the new
|
|||
|
branch configuration as the 'cm ^partial ^configure' command would do.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:/main/task
|
|||
|
(Sets /main/task as working branch and updates the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:/main/task --^configure +/art/images
|
|||
|
(Sets /main/task as working branch and configures the workspace to
|
|||
|
load the /art/images folder.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Undoes the checkout on an item.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [--^silent]
|
|||
|
[--^keepchanges | -^k]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^keepchanges (-^k) Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
|
|||
|
Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
|
|||
|
changed with the same content on disk that it was.
|
|||
|
This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use double quotes (" ")
|
|||
|
to specify paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate paths. Use . to apply the operation to current
|
|||
|
directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If an item is checked-out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
|
|||
|
the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
|
|||
|
out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undocheckout .
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undocheckout pic1.png pic2.png
|
|||
|
cm ^unco c:\workspace\design01.png
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Undoes changes in a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo [<path>[ ...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
[<filter>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[--^silent | --^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
-^r | --^recursive Executes the undo recursively.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
--^checkedout Select checked-out files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^unchanged Select files whose content is unchanged.
|
|||
|
--^changed Select locally changed or checked-out files and
|
|||
|
directories.
|
|||
|
--^deleted Select deleted files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^moved Select moved files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^added Select added files and directories.
|
|||
|
path Path of the files or directories to apply the
|
|||
|
operation to. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate paths.
|
|||
|
If no path is specified, by default the undo
|
|||
|
operation will take all of the files in the current
|
|||
|
directory.
|
|||
|
filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given
|
|||
|
paths. Use a whitespace to separate filters. See the
|
|||
|
Filters section for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The ^undo command is dangerous - it undoes work in an irreversible way.
|
|||
|
Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous state
|
|||
|
of the files and directories affected by it. If no path is specified
|
|||
|
in the arguments, by default it will undo every change in the current
|
|||
|
directory, but not recursively.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- src
|
|||
|
- file.txt
|
|||
|
- code.cs
|
|||
|
- /test
|
|||
|
- test_a.py
|
|||
|
- test_b.py
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo *
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo .
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To undo all of the changes below a directory (including changes affecting
|
|||
|
the directory itself):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo dirpath -^r
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
|
|||
|
undone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Filters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no flag is specified, by default, all changes are undone, but the
|
|||
|
paths can be filtered using one or more of the flags below.
|
|||
|
If a file or directory matches one or more of the specified kinds of change,
|
|||
|
all of the changes on said file or directory will be undone.
|
|||
|
For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file is
|
|||
|
both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo . -^r
|
|||
|
(Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
|
|||
|
from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^co file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes the checkout on file.txt.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes the local change to file.txt.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo src
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo src/*
|
|||
|
(Undo changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
|
|||
|
affecting src.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo *.cs
|
|||
|
(Undo changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
|||
|
directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo *.cs -^r
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
|||
|
directory and every directory below it.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^co file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo --^unchanged
|
|||
|
(Undoes the checkout of unchanged file2.txt, ignoring locally changed
|
|||
|
file1.txt.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^co file1.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo --^checkedout
|
|||
|
(Undoes the changes in checked-out file file1.txt, ignoring file2.txt as it is
|
|||
|
not checked-out.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes the add of file.txt, making it once again a private file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^rm file1.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^add file3.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^undo --^deleted --^added *
|
|||
|
(Undoes the file1.txt delete and file3.txt add, ignoring the file2.txt
|
|||
|
change.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Updates the partial workspace and downloads latest changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^changeset=<number>]
|
|||
|
[--^silent | --^report] [--^dontmerge]
|
|||
|
[--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^changeset Updates the partial workspace to a specific changeset.
|
|||
|
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard
|
|||
|
output. It is possible to specify an output file.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
By default "utf-8" will be assigned.
|
|||
|
--^report Prints a list of the applied changes when the command
|
|||
|
is finished. Using '--^silent' will override this setting.
|
|||
|
--^dontmerge Does not merge the file conflicts, it just skips them.
|
|||
|
The other changes are properly applied. This option can
|
|||
|
be useful for automation to avoid user interaction.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to be updated. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use . to apply update to current directory.
|
|||
|
If no path is specified, then the current partial
|
|||
|
workspace is fully updated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PARTIAL_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^partial ^update' command updates the out-of-date files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If all the specified paths are files inside the same Xlink when using the
|
|||
|
'--^changeset' option, then the versions to download are searched in the
|
|||
|
specified changeset of the Xlinked repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update
|
|||
|
(Updates all in the current partial workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update .
|
|||
|
(Updates all current directory children items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update backgroud-blue.png
|
|||
|
(Updates 'backgroud-blue.png' item.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update soft_black.png soft-grey.png
|
|||
|
(Updates 'soft_black.png' and 'soft-grey.png' items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update src --^report
|
|||
|
(Updates all 'src' directory children items, printing the applied changes
|
|||
|
list at the end.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update src --^changeset=4
|
|||
|
(Updates all 'src' directory children items to the content they loaded
|
|||
|
in the changeset 4.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update xlink/first.png --^changeset=4
|
|||
|
(Updates 'xlink/first.png' item to the content it loaded in the changeset 4
|
|||
|
of the Xlinked repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^partial ^update . --^changeset=2 --^xml=output.xml 2>errors.txt
|
|||
|
(Updates all current directory children items to the content they loaded
|
|||
|
in the changeset 2, reporting the result in XML format. The output is stored
|
|||
|
in a file named 'output.xml' and errors are redirected to the file 'errors.txt'.
|
|||
|
NOTE: redirection syntax rely on the shell.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PATCH ==
|
|||
|
Generates a patch file from a spec or applies a generated patch to the current
|
|||
|
workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PATCH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch <source_spec> [<source_spec>] [--^output=<output_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^tool=<path_to_diff>]
|
|||
|
(Generates a patch file that contains the differences of a branch,
|
|||
|
a changeset, or the differences between changesets. It also tracks
|
|||
|
differences of text and binary files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch --^apply <patch_file> [--^tool=<path_to_patch>]
|
|||
|
(Allows to apply the contents of a generated patch file in the current
|
|||
|
workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^output Sets the output file of the patch command.
|
|||
|
--^tool Sets the application to use (diff or patch).
|
|||
|
source_spec Full spec of a changeset or a branch. (Use
|
|||
|
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
output_file File to save the patch content. It no file is specified,
|
|||
|
the patch content will be printed on standard output.
|
|||
|
patch_file Patch file to apply in the current workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PATCH ==
|
|||
|
Limitations:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the output patch file already exists, the command will not overwrite it.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When applying a patch, the command will not apply changes to modified files
|
|||
|
if they are not present on disk.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Important:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command requires Diff and Patch tools, publicly available at
|
|||
|
http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/patch.htm and
|
|||
|
http://gnuwin32.sourceforge.net/packages/diffutils.htm
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Once installed, it's recommended to add their location to the PATH
|
|||
|
environment variable.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch ^cs:4@default@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Prints on console the differences of cset 4 in unified format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch
|
|||
|
(Generates a patch file with the differences of branch "main".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch ^br:/main --^output=file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\diff.exe
|
|||
|
(Same as above, using a custom exe.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch ^cs:2@default ^cs:4@default
|
|||
|
(Prints on console the differences between csets 2 and 4 in unified format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^patch --^apply file.patch --^tool=C:\gnu\patch.exe
|
|||
|
(Applies the patch in 'file.patch' to the local workspace with a custom exe.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage server connection profiles.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^list | ^ls
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^profile <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^profile <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^list
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^create
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete 1
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists the server connection profiles configured on the client.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format.
|
|||
|
See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{^index} | {0} Profile index in the profiles list
|
|||
|
{^name} | {1} Profile name
|
|||
|
{^server} | {2} Profile server
|
|||
|
{^user} | {3} Profile user
|
|||
|
{^workingmode} | {4} Profile working mode
|
|||
|
{^securityconfig} | {5} Profile security config
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile
|
|||
|
(Lists all the profiles using the default format)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile --^format="{index,2} {server,-20}"
|
|||
|
(Writes the profile index in 2 spaces, aligned to the right, then two blanks,
|
|||
|
and then the repository server in 20 spaces, aligned to the left.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile --^format="{0,2} {2,-20}"
|
|||
|
(Writes the same output as the previous example.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new server connection profile.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk]
|
|||
|
(Creates a new profile interactively.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
|
|||
|
--^password=<password> --^workingmode=<workingmode>
|
|||
|
(Creates a new server connection profile using a user/password
|
|||
|
authentication mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile [^create | ^mk] --^server=<server_addr> --^username=<username>
|
|||
|
--^token=<token> --^workingmode=SSOWorkingMode
|
|||
|
(Creates a new server connection profile using Single Sign On authentication
|
|||
|
mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Creates the connection profile for the specified server.
|
|||
|
--^username The username that should be used in the connection profile
|
|||
|
--^password The plain-text password that should be used in the connection
|
|||
|
profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
|
|||
|
that are based on a user and password.
|
|||
|
--^token The plain-text token that should be used in the connection
|
|||
|
profile. This option is only valid for authentication modes
|
|||
|
that are based on a token (SSOWorkingMode for now).
|
|||
|
--^workingmode The target server's authentication mode.
|
|||
|
Available users/security working modes:
|
|||
|
^LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
|
|||
|
^UPWorkingMode (User and password)
|
|||
|
^SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When using this command interactively (without options), the client will try
|
|||
|
to connect to the server to obtain the working mode and check the credentials.
|
|||
|
This guarantees that the resulting profile is correct.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When specifying the options, the client will generate the connection profile
|
|||
|
without connecting to the server. This is useful when creating connection
|
|||
|
profiles for automation purposes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^create
|
|||
|
(Creates a new connection profile interactively.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
|
|||
|
--^password=thisissupersecret --^workingmode=LDAPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
(Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
|
|||
|
using user 'sergio' and password 'thisissupersecret' through LDAP working mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^create --^server=plastic.domain.com:8087 --^username=sergio
|
|||
|
--^token="TOKENAMoKJ9iAA(...)12fssoprov:unityid" --workingmode=^SSOWorkingMode
|
|||
|
(Creates a new connection profile to connect to 'plastic.domain.com:8087'
|
|||
|
using user 'sergio' and the specified token through Single Sign On working mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm <index | name>
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --^index=<index>
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete | ^rm --^name=<name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^index Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
|
|||
|
--^name Used to disambiguate in case a profile has a name that is a number
|
|||
|
index Profile index in the profiles list.
|
|||
|
name Profile name.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PROFILE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Deletes a server connection profile from the client's configuration.
|
|||
|
It works both with the profile index and the profile name.
|
|||
|
The 'cm ^profile ^list' command does not show profile names by default,
|
|||
|
check 'cm ^profile ^list --help' to check how to output profile's name.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete 1
|
|||
|
(Removes the profile at index 1.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete 192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
(Removes the profile with name '192.168.0.2:8087_UPWorkingMode'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^profile ^delete --name=12
|
|||
|
(Removes the profile with name '12'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_QUERY ==
|
|||
|
Executes SQL queries. Requires SQL storage.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_QUERY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^query <sql_command> [--^outputfile=<output_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^solveuser=<column_name>[,...]]
|
|||
|
[--^solvepath=<column_name>[,...]]
|
|||
|
[--^columnwidth=<value>] [--^nocolumnname]
|
|||
|
[--^columnseparator=<sep>] [--^repository=<name>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^outputfile Writes the result in an output file.
|
|||
|
--^solveuser Sets the specified columns as username columns. The
|
|||
|
query interpreter will assume that data of these columns
|
|||
|
will be users, and will try to solve them.
|
|||
|
--^solvepath Sets the specified columns as itemid column. The query
|
|||
|
interpreter will try to solve item id to filesystem
|
|||
|
paths.
|
|||
|
--^columnwidth Specifies the width of each column to format the output.
|
|||
|
--^nocolumnname Does not print column name.
|
|||
|
--^columnseparator Uses char as column separator instead of a tab (\t).
|
|||
|
--^repository Repository to query.
|
|||
|
sql_command The sql query to be executed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_QUERY ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to execute SQL queries in the server database.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In order to write SQL queries, use these two pre-defined functions to manage
|
|||
|
users and paths:
|
|||
|
- '^SolveUser(<username>)' that resolves a username into Unity VCS format.
|
|||
|
- '^SolvePath(<path>)' that resolves a disk path into an item id.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Also, you can use options to show query results in a human readable form.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can use the options '--^solveuser=<column_name>' and
|
|||
|
'--^solvepath=<column_name>' to specify columns that query interpreter
|
|||
|
must convert to a legible text. You can specify more than one column name,
|
|||
|
comma separated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision" --^columnwidth=25 --^repository=reptest
|
|||
|
(Retrieves data from 'revision' table from repository 'reptest'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^query "^SELECT b.^sname ^as br_name, o.^dtimestamp ^as date ^from ^branch b, \
|
|||
|
^object o, ^seid s ^where b.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and \
|
|||
|
s.^scode='^SolveUser(john)'" --^outputfile=query.txt
|
|||
|
(Outputs into a file the branches with owner 'john'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^query "^select r.^iobjid, r.^fiditem ^as path, s.^scode ^as username ^FROM \
|
|||
|
^revision r, ^object o, ^seid s ^WHERE r.^iobjid=o.^iobjid ^and \
|
|||
|
o.^fidowner=s.^iseidid ^and o.^dtimestamp>04/25/2014" \
|
|||
|
--^solveuser=username --^solvepath=path --^repository=reptest@server2:9095
|
|||
|
(Retrieves selected data from selected repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^query "^SELECT * ^FROM ^revision ^WHERE ^fiditem=^SolvePath(c:\mywkpath\info)"
|
|||
|
(Retrieves all revision data of path 'info'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes one or more attributes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^delete | ^rm <att_spec>[ ...]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
att_spec Attributes to delete. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
attributes.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about attribute
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command removes one or more attributes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^delete ^att:status
|
|||
|
(Deletes the attribute 'status'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^att ^rm status ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084
|
|||
|
(Deletes the attributes 'status' and 'integrated'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
|||
|
Unsets an object's attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^unset <att_spec> <object_spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about attribute specs.)
|
|||
|
object_spec Specification of the object to remove the attribute
|
|||
|
from. Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
|
|||
|
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_UNSET ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command unsets an attribute that was previously set on an object. It
|
|||
|
does not delete the attribute object itself.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^unset ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105
|
|||
|
(Removes attribute realization 'status' from branch 'main/SCM105'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^att ^unset ^att:integrated@reptest@localhost:8084 ^cs:25@reptest@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Removes attribute realization 'integrated' from changeset 25, all in
|
|||
|
repository 'reptest'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Renames an attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^rename <att_spec> <new_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
att_spec Attribute to rename. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn
|
|||
|
more about attribute specs.)
|
|||
|
new_name New name for the attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command renames an attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^rename ^att:status state
|
|||
|
(Renames the attribute 'status' to 'state'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Edits the comment of an attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^edit <att_spec> <new_comment>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
att_spec Attribute to change its comment. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about attribute specs.)
|
|||
|
new_comment New comment for the attribute. You can also specify a
|
|||
|
default list of values for the attribute. See Remarks for
|
|||
|
more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_EDIT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command changes the comment of an attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To specify a default list of values for the attribute, you just need to
|
|||
|
include a line like the following in the attribute comment:
|
|||
|
'default: value_one, "value two", value3, "Final value"'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "The status of a branch in the CI pipeline."
|
|||
|
(Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^edit ^att:status "Status of a branch. default: open, resolved, reviewed"
|
|||
|
(Edits the comment of the attribute 'status'. And also specifies a list of
|
|||
|
values. So when you set the attribute 'status' to an object, you can select
|
|||
|
one of the following values: "open", "resolved", or "reviewed".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PULL ==
|
|||
|
Pulls a branch from another repo.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PULL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
|
|||
|
[--^preview] [--^nodata] [TranslateOptions]
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Direct server-to-server replication. Pulls a branch from a repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull <dst_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Package based replication. Imports the package in the destination repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_br_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Introduces the missing data for all the changesets of a branch previously
|
|||
|
replicated with '--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified,
|
|||
|
Unity VCS tries to use the "replication source" (origin of the replicated
|
|||
|
branch)).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^hydrate <dst_cs_spec> [<src_rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Introduces the missing data for a changeset previously replicated with
|
|||
|
'--^nodata'. If a repo to obtain the data is not specified, Unity VCS tries
|
|||
|
to use the "replication source").
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^preview Gives information about what changes will be pulled but
|
|||
|
no changes are actually performed. This option is useful
|
|||
|
to check the data that will be transferred before
|
|||
|
replicating changes.
|
|||
|
--^nodata Replicates the branch changes without replicating the
|
|||
|
data. This option is not allowed with package
|
|||
|
replication.
|
|||
|
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
|||
|
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
|||
|
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
|||
|
--^package Specifies the previously created package file to import
|
|||
|
for package based replication. Useful to move data between
|
|||
|
servers when there is no direct network connection. Refer to
|
|||
|
'cm ^push' to create a package file.
|
|||
|
src_br_spec The branch to pull from a remote repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_br_spec The branch to hydrate.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_cs_spec The changeset to hydrate.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository specs.)
|
|||
|
TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
|
|||
|
AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Translate options:
|
|||
|
Mode:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
|
|||
|
The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
|
|||
|
modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
|
|||
|
the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
|
|||
|
values:
|
|||
|
^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
|
|||
|
^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
|
|||
|
^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
|||
|
(see below).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Specifics if mode is set to "table":
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^trtable=<translation_table_file>
|
|||
|
If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
|
|||
|
containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
|
|||
|
branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
|
|||
|
a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
|
|||
|
to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Authentication options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
|
|||
|
- Using authentication parameters.
|
|||
|
- Using an authentication file.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using authentication parameters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Where --^authmode can take one of the following values
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^NameWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^LDAPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^ADWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
(^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
|||
|
(^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
|
|||
|
in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
|
|||
|
file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS GUI in the replication
|
|||
|
profiles tab under Preferences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using an authentication file:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It's possible to have a different file for each server you connect to,
|
|||
|
with the credentials for that server and --^authfile=<authentication_file>
|
|||
|
where the authentication_file must be formed by the following 2 lines:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
|
|||
|
2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PULL ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^pull' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
|
|||
|
changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
|
|||
|
The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A '^pull' operation means that the replication operation will demand data
|
|||
|
from the source repository to be stored into the destination repository.
|
|||
|
The client will connect to the destination repository and, from that host,
|
|||
|
it will establish a connection to the source repository to retrieve the
|
|||
|
targeted data. During pull it is the destination server which will be
|
|||
|
connected to the source.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Although in a typical distributed scenario a developer pushes data from his
|
|||
|
local server to the main server, the developer might want to pull the latest
|
|||
|
repository updates from the main server, too.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have been made
|
|||
|
on the same branch on two replicated repositories:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
|
|||
|
than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
|
|||
|
changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
|
|||
|
- Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
|
|||
|
correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
|
|||
|
is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
|
|||
|
scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
|
|||
|
changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
|
|||
|
being able to push again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Pull can work in two modes:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1) Direct communication between servers: The destination server will fetch
|
|||
|
the data from the source server, automatically synchronizing data for
|
|||
|
the specified branch. It requires the user running the command to be
|
|||
|
authenticated by the remote server, either using the default authentication
|
|||
|
in the client.conf file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata'
|
|||
|
modifiers, or '--^authmode' and '--^user' and '--^password' if the authentication
|
|||
|
mode is ^UPWorkingMode.
|
|||
|
2) Import a previously generated package with push and the '--^package' option.
|
|||
|
This mode requires using a package file previously generated with the push
|
|||
|
command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Keep in mind that pull replication works in an indirect way. When executed,
|
|||
|
the command asks the destination repository to connect to the source and
|
|||
|
obtain the selected branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
However, this can be done directly by using the push command. This will make
|
|||
|
the command replicate the selected branch from source to destination.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Pulls the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver'. In this case,
|
|||
|
both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
|||
|
(Pulls the same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
|
|||
|
to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
|
|||
|
from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
|
|||
|
integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
|
|||
|
password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 \
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
|
|||
|
(Pulls the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
|
|||
|
server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
|
|||
|
Unity VCS.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^br:/main@project1@remoteserver:8084 projectx@myserver:8084 --^nodata
|
|||
|
(Replicates the 'main' branch from 'remoteserver' to 'myserver' without data.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^hydrate ^br:/main@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Hydrates all the changesets in the 'main' branch obtaining the data from
|
|||
|
the remote server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^pull ^hydrate ^cs:122169@projectx@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Hydrates changeset 122169 in 'myserver' obtaining the data from the remote
|
|||
|
server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PUSH ==
|
|||
|
Pushes a branch to another repo.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PUSH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^push <src_br_spec> <dst_rep_spec>
|
|||
|
[--^preview] [TranslateOptions]
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] | AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Direct server-to-server replication. Pushes a branch from a repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^push <src_br_spec> --^package=<pack_file> [AuthOptions]
|
|||
|
(Package based replication. Creates a replication package in the source
|
|||
|
server with the selected branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^preview Gives information about what changes will be pushed,
|
|||
|
but no changes are actually performed. This option is
|
|||
|
useful to check the data that will be transferred before
|
|||
|
replicating changes.
|
|||
|
--^package Specifies path for exporting replication package for
|
|||
|
package based replication.
|
|||
|
Useful to move data between servers when there is no
|
|||
|
direct network connection.
|
|||
|
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
|||
|
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
|||
|
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
|||
|
src_br_spec The branch to push to a remote repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_rep_spec The destination repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
TranslateOptions See the Translate options section for more information.
|
|||
|
AuthOptions See the Authentication options section for more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Translate options:
|
|||
|
Mode:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>)
|
|||
|
The source and destination repositories may use different authentication
|
|||
|
modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies how to translate the user names from
|
|||
|
the source to the destination. The '--^trmode' must be one of the following
|
|||
|
values:
|
|||
|
^copy (Default). Means that the user identifiers will be just copied.
|
|||
|
^name The user identifiers will be matched by name.
|
|||
|
^table Uses a translation table specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
|||
|
(see below).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Specifics if mode is set to "table":
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^trtable=<translation_table_file>
|
|||
|
If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table is a file
|
|||
|
containing lines in the form <oldname;newname> (one per line). When the
|
|||
|
branch is written to the destination repository, the objects created by
|
|||
|
a user identified by "oldname" in the source repository will be set
|
|||
|
to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Authentication options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Authentication data can be specified using one of the two following modes:
|
|||
|
- Using authentication parameters.
|
|||
|
- Using an authentication file.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using authentication parameters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Where --^authmode can take one of the following values
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^NameWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^LDAPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^ADWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- ^UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
(^LDAPWorkingMode) --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
|||
|
(^UPWorkingMode) --^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '--^authdata' line is the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry
|
|||
|
in the client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The profiles.conf
|
|||
|
file can be easily generated from the Unity VCS GUI in the replication
|
|||
|
profiles tab under Preferences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If you are using ^UPWorkingMode, you can simply specify:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=<user> --^password=<psw>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using an authentication file:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It's possible to have a different file for each server you connect to,
|
|||
|
with the credentials for that server and --^authfile=<authentication_file>
|
|||
|
where the authentication_file must be formed by the following 2 lines:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1) mode, as described in '--^authmode'
|
|||
|
2) authentication data, as described in '--^authdata'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PUSH ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^push' command is able to replicate branches (along with their
|
|||
|
changesets) between a source repository and a destination repository.
|
|||
|
The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
There are two replication operations: '^push' and '^pull'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A '^push' operation means that the replication operation will send data
|
|||
|
from the source repository to the destination repository. In this case,
|
|||
|
the client will connect to the source repository, getting the data to
|
|||
|
replicate, and then it will send it to the destination repository. While
|
|||
|
the former (source) must have connectivity to the destination, the latter
|
|||
|
(destination) will not connect itself to the source.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
In a typical distributed scenario, a developer pushes data from his local
|
|||
|
server to the main server. Also, the developer might want to pull the latest
|
|||
|
repository updates from the main server, too.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication can resolve situations where concurrent changes have
|
|||
|
been made on the same branch on two replicated repositories.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Push: If you try to push your data to a repository having newer changes
|
|||
|
than those you are sending, the system will ask you to pull the latest
|
|||
|
changes, resolve the merge operation and, finally, try to push again.
|
|||
|
- Pull: Whenever you pull changesets from a remote branch, they will be
|
|||
|
correctly linked to their parent changesets. If the changeset you pulled
|
|||
|
is not a child of the last changeset in the branch, then a multi-headed
|
|||
|
scenario will appear. The branch will have more than one 'head', or last
|
|||
|
changeset on the branch. You will need to merge the two 'heads' before
|
|||
|
being able to push again.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Push can work in two modes:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1) Direct communication between servers: The origin server will send
|
|||
|
the data to the destination server, automatically synchronizing data
|
|||
|
for the specified branch.
|
|||
|
2) Export package mode: The client will only connect to the source and
|
|||
|
generate a replication package obtaining both data and metadata for the
|
|||
|
specified branch. The '--^package' modifier will be used.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Both modes require the user running the command to be authenticated
|
|||
|
by the server, either using the default authentication in the client.conf
|
|||
|
file, or specifiying the '--^authmode' and '--^authdata' modifiers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The ^push replication works in a direct way. When executed, the command
|
|||
|
will replicate the selected branch from source to destination, instead of
|
|||
|
asking the destination repository to connect to the source and obtain the
|
|||
|
selected branch (as the pull does).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084
|
|||
|
(Replicates the 'main' branch from 'myserver' to 'remoteserver'. In this case,
|
|||
|
both servers are configured with the same authentication mode.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
|||
|
(Replicates same branch as before, but now the remote server is configured
|
|||
|
to authenticate users with Active Directory. For instance, I am connecting
|
|||
|
from a Linux machine to a Windows server configured to use Active Directory
|
|||
|
integrated mode. I will specify my Active Directory user and cyphered
|
|||
|
password and pass it as LDAP to the server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^push ^br:/main@project1@myserver:8084 projectx@remoteserver:8084 \
|
|||
|
--^authmode=^UPWorkingMode --^user=dave --^password=mysecret
|
|||
|
(Replicates the same branch, but now users are authenticated on the remote
|
|||
|
server, taking advantage of the user/password database included in
|
|||
|
Unity VCS.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CLONE ==
|
|||
|
Clones a remote repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CLONE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> [<dst_rep_spec> | <dst_repserver_spec>]
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] |
|
|||
|
[--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>] |
|
|||
|
[--^authfile=<authentication_file>]]
|
|||
|
[--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>]
|
|||
|
(Direct repository-to-repository clone.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone <src_rep_spec> --^package=<pack_file>
|
|||
|
[--^user=<usr_name> [--^password=<pwd>] |
|
|||
|
[--^authmode=<mode> --^authdata=<data>] |
|
|||
|
[--^authfile=<authentication_file>]]
|
|||
|
[--^trmode=(^copy|^name|^table --^trtable=<translation_table_file>]
|
|||
|
(Clones to an intermediate package, that can be imported later using a
|
|||
|
pull into the destination repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^user, --^password Credentials to use if the authentication mode is
|
|||
|
different in source and destination and there is not a
|
|||
|
profile to authenticate to destination.
|
|||
|
--^package Exports the specified repository to a package file,
|
|||
|
instead of a repository.
|
|||
|
Useful for moving data between servers when there is no
|
|||
|
direct network connection.
|
|||
|
The resulting package must be imported using the
|
|||
|
pull command.
|
|||
|
--^authmode Describes the authentication method used in the server.
|
|||
|
Admisible values: ^NameWorkingMode, ^LDAPWorkingMode,
|
|||
|
^ADWorkingMode, ^UPWorkingMode.
|
|||
|
--^authdata Authentication information sent to the server. It holds
|
|||
|
the content of the <^SecurityConfig> entry in the
|
|||
|
client.conf file and the profiles.conf file. The
|
|||
|
profiles.conf file can be easily generated from the Unity
|
|||
|
VCS in the connection profiles tab under Preferences.
|
|||
|
--^authfile Allows to specify a path to a file with the credentials.
|
|||
|
--^trmode The source and destination repositories may use different
|
|||
|
authentication modes. The '--^trmode' option specifies
|
|||
|
how to translate the user names from the source to the
|
|||
|
destination. It must be one of the following values:
|
|||
|
^copy: (Default.) Means that the user identifiers will
|
|||
|
be just copied; ^name: The user identifiers will be
|
|||
|
matched by name; ^table: Uses a translation table
|
|||
|
specified in the option '--^trtable'
|
|||
|
--^trtable If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table
|
|||
|
is a file containing lines in the form <oldname;newname>
|
|||
|
(one per line). When the branch is written to the
|
|||
|
destination repository, the objects created by a user
|
|||
|
identified by "oldname" in the source repository will
|
|||
|
be set to the user with "newname" on the destination.
|
|||
|
src_rep_spec Source repository of the clone operation.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_rep_spec Destination repository of the clone operation. If it
|
|||
|
exists, it must be empty. If it does not exist, it will
|
|||
|
be created.
|
|||
|
If it is not specified, the command will use user's
|
|||
|
default repository server.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
dst_repserver_spec Destination repository server of the clone operation.
|
|||
|
If there is a repository with the same name as
|
|||
|
<src_rep_spec> in the destination repository server, it
|
|||
|
must be empty. If there is not, it will be created.
|
|||
|
If it is not specified, the command will use user's
|
|||
|
default repository server.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about repository
|
|||
|
server specs.)
|
|||
|
translation_table_file If the translation mode is 'table', a translation table
|
|||
|
is a file containing lines in the form <oldname;newname>
|
|||
|
(one per line). When the branch is written to the destination
|
|||
|
repository, the objects created by a user identified by
|
|||
|
"oldname" in the source repository will be set to the user
|
|||
|
with "newname" on the destination.
|
|||
|
authentication_file Authentication file where you may have a different file
|
|||
|
for each server you connect to, containing the credentials
|
|||
|
for that server. The file format must comply with the
|
|||
|
following structure: 2 lines, where the first line
|
|||
|
describes the authentication mode, equally described as in
|
|||
|
--^auth_mode; and the second line containing the data as
|
|||
|
sdescribed in --^auth_data.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CLONE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The clone command can replicate branches (along with their changesets,
|
|||
|
labels, attributes, reviews, and so on) from a source repository to a
|
|||
|
destination repository. The repositories can be located at different servers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The destination repository can be created beforehand, but if it contains
|
|||
|
previous data, the clone operation will fail.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The clone operation does NOT clone repository submodules, nor repositories
|
|||
|
under a Xlink.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone awesomeProject@tardis@cloud
|
|||
|
(Clones 'awesomeProject' repository from 'tardis@cloud' organization into
|
|||
|
a local repository with the same name.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone repo@server.home:9095 repo-local
|
|||
|
(Clones 'repo' from 'server.home:9095' into 'repo-local' at user's default
|
|||
|
repository server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@192.168.111.130:8084 ^repserver:192.168.111.200:9095
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from '192.168.111.130:8084' into
|
|||
|
'project@192.168.111.200:9095'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authmode=^LDAPWorkingMode \
|
|||
|
--^authdata=::0:dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using LDAP
|
|||
|
authentication against the remote repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@upserver:8084 --authmode=^UPWorkingMode \
|
|||
|
--^authdata=dave:fPBea2rPsQaagEW3pKNveA==
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from 'upserver:8084' using UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
authentication against the remote repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@upserver:8084 --authmode=^UPWorkingMode \
|
|||
|
--^user=<user> --^password=<pwd>
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from 'upserver:8084' using UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
authentication against the remote repository but specifying the
|
|||
|
^user and ^password instead of the ^authdata.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@ldapserver:8084 --authfile=credentials.txt \
|
|||
|
--^trmode=table --^trtable=table.txt
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from 'ldapserver:8084' using an authentication
|
|||
|
file against the remote repository, and translating users following the
|
|||
|
specified translation table.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^clone project@server.home:9095 --^package=project.plasticpkg
|
|||
|
cm ^repository ^create project@mordor.home:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^pull --^package=project.plasticpkg project@mordor.home:8084
|
|||
|
(Clones 'project' repository from 'server.home:9095' into the package
|
|||
|
'project.plasticpkg', which is later imported through a pull into
|
|||
|
the 'project' repository at 'mordor.home:8084'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVERT ==
|
|||
|
Reverts an item to a previous revision.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REVERT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^revert <revspec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
revspec Specification of the changeset that contains the
|
|||
|
revision which content will be loaded in the workspace.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about revision specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REVERT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The item must be checked in.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^revert dir#^cs:0
|
|||
|
cm ^revert C:\mywks\dir\file1.txt#23456
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Displays the history of a file or directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^history | ^hist <item_path>[ ...] [--^long | --^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^symlink] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^moveddeleted]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^long Shows additional information.
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info. This option cannnot be combined
|
|||
|
with '--^xml'.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the history operation to the symlink and not to
|
|||
|
the target.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file. This option
|
|||
|
cannot be combined with '--^format'.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^moveddeleted Include move and remove operations in the history.
|
|||
|
--^limit Displays the N most recent revisions for the specified items,
|
|||
|
sorted by date and changeset id. If a negative number is supplied,
|
|||
|
it will return an empty list. If a number higher than the number
|
|||
|
of revisions is supplied, it will return all the available revisions
|
|||
|
regarding that item.
|
|||
|
item_path Item's path. Use a whitespace to separate paths. Use
|
|||
|
double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
|||
|
Paths can be server path revisions too.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command shows a list of revisions for a given item, and label, branch,
|
|||
|
and comment info for each revision.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
{0} | {^date} Date.
|
|||
|
{1} | {^changesetid} Changeset number.
|
|||
|
{2} | {^branch} Branch.
|
|||
|
{4} | {^comment} Comment.
|
|||
|
{5} | {^owner} Owner.
|
|||
|
{6} | {^id} Revision id.
|
|||
|
{7} | {^repository} Repository.
|
|||
|
{8} | {^server} Server.
|
|||
|
{9} | {^repspec} Repository spec.
|
|||
|
{10} | {^datastatus} Availability of the revision data.
|
|||
|
{11} | {^path} Path or spec passed as <item_path>.
|
|||
|
{12} | {^itemid} Item Id.
|
|||
|
{13} | {^size} Size.
|
|||
|
{14} | {^hash} Hash code.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^history file1.txt "file 2.txt"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^hist c:\workspace --^long
|
|||
|
(Displays all information.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^history link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Applies the history operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^history ^serverpath:/src/foo/bar.c#^br:/main/task001@myserver
|
|||
|
(Retrieves the revision history from a server path in a given branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^history bar.c, foo.c --long --limit=2
|
|||
|
(Retrieves the 2 last revisions for the bar.c and foo.c items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REVISION_TREE ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.**
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Shows the revision tree for an item.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REVISION_TREE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tree <path> [--^symlink]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the operation to the link file and not to the target.
|
|||
|
path Item path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REVISION_TREE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tree fichero1.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^tree c:\workspace
|
|||
|
cm ^tree link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Applies the operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to delete files and directories.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove | ^rm <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^controlled (optional)
|
|||
|
- ^private
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^remove <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^remove <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REMOVE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove \path\controlled_file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^remove ^private \path\private_file.txt
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a file or directory from version control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove | ^rm <item_path>[ ...] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
[--^errorformat=<str_format>] [--^nodisk]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output progress message in a specific
|
|||
|
format. See the Examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^errorformat Retrieves the error message (if any) in a specific
|
|||
|
format. See the Examples for more information.
|
|||
|
--^nodisk Removes from version control, but keeps the item on
|
|||
|
disk.
|
|||
|
item_path Items path to remove. Use double quotes (" ") to specify
|
|||
|
paths containing spaces. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REMOVE_CONTROLLED ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Items are deleted from disk. Removed items are removed from the parent
|
|||
|
directory in the source code control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^remove' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a single
|
|||
|
dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example: cm ^remove -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify which files to remove.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^remove -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, removes all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove src
|
|||
|
(Removes 'src'. If src is a directory, this is the same as
|
|||
|
'cm ^remove -^R src'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^format="{0} - REMOVED" \
|
|||
|
--^errorformat="{0} - ERROR REMOVING"
|
|||
|
(Removes 'file.txt' from version control and from disk, writing
|
|||
|
"c:\workspace\file.txt - ^REMOVED" if the operation succeeded, or
|
|||
|
"c:\workspace\file.txt - ^ERROR ^REMOVING" otherwise.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove c:\workspace\file.txt --^nodisk
|
|||
|
(Removes 'file.txt' from version control, but keeps it on disk.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a private file or directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Warning: files deleted using the command are permanently erased, and are not
|
|||
|
recoverable. It is recommended that you use the '--^dry-run' option to check
|
|||
|
which files will be affected by the command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove | ^rm ^private <path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive] [--^ignored]
|
|||
|
[--^verbose] [--^dry-run]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Recursively deletes private files from within controlled
|
|||
|
directories.
|
|||
|
--^ignored Deletes also ignored and cloaked files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^verbose Prints all affected paths.
|
|||
|
--^dry-run Runs the command without making any changes on disk.
|
|||
|
path Path of the files or directories to remove. Use double
|
|||
|
quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces. Use a
|
|||
|
whitespace to separate paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_REMOVE_PRIVATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the path is a private file or directory, it will be deleted from disk.
|
|||
|
If the path is a controlled file, the command fails.
|
|||
|
If the path is a controlled directory, the command fails unless you
|
|||
|
specify the '-^r' option, in which case it will delete all private files and
|
|||
|
directories below the specified directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove ^private private_directory
|
|||
|
(Deletes 'private_directory'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove ^private c:\workspace\controlled_directory
|
|||
|
(Fails, because 'controlled_directory' is not private.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^remove ^private -^r c:\workspace\controlled_directory
|
|||
|
(Deletes all private files and directories below 'controlled_directory'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^rm ^private --^dry-run --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
|
|||
|
(Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
|
|||
|
'controlled_directory' without actually deleting anything.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^rm ^private --^verbose c:\workspace\controlled_directory -^r
|
|||
|
(Shows all of the paths affected by the deletion of private files below
|
|||
|
'controlled_directory', performing the delete.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a trigger.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger | ^tr ^delete | ^rm <subtype-type> <position_number>
|
|||
|
[--^server=<repserverspec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Deletes the trigger on the specified server.
|
|||
|
If no server is specified, executes the command on the
|
|||
|
one configured on the client.
|
|||
|
subtype-type Trigger execution and trigger operation.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^showtriggertypes' to see a list of trigger
|
|||
|
types.)
|
|||
|
position_number Position assigned to the trigger when it was created.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^delete ^after-setselector 4
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
|||
|
Sets an attribute on a given object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute | ^att ^set <att_spec> <object_spec> <att_value>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
att_spec Attribute specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about attribute specs.)
|
|||
|
object_spec Specification of the object to set the attribute on.
|
|||
|
Attributes can be set on: branches, changesets,
|
|||
|
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
att_value The attribute value to set to the object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_ATTRIBUTE_SET ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
An attribute can be set on an object to save additional information for
|
|||
|
this object.
|
|||
|
Attributes can be set on the following objects: branches, changesets,
|
|||
|
shelvesets, labels, items, and revisions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^attribute ^set ^att:status ^br:/main/SCM105 open
|
|||
|
(Sets attribute 'status' to branch 'SCM105' with value 'open'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^att ^set ^att:integrated@reptest@server2:8084 ^lb:LB008@reptest@server2:8084 yes
|
|||
|
(Sets attribute 'integrated' to label 'LB008' in repository 'reptest' with
|
|||
|
value 'yes'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Sets the owner of an object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SETOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^setowner | ^sto --^user=<usr_name> | --^group=<group> <object_spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^user User name. New owner of the object.
|
|||
|
--^group Group name. New owner of the object.
|
|||
|
object_spec Specification of the object to set the new owner on.
|
|||
|
The owner can be set on the following objects:
|
|||
|
repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
|
|||
|
label, item, revision and attribute.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SETOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The owner of an object can be a user or a group.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The owner can be set on the following objects: repository server,
|
|||
|
repository, branch, changeset, label, item, revision, and attribute.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^setowner --^user=john ^repserver:localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Sets 'john' as repository server owner.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^sto --^group=development ^rep:mainRep@PlasticServer:8084
|
|||
|
(Sets 'development' group as owner of 'mainRep' repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SETSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.**
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sets the selector to a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SETSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Selectors are discontinued and its use is not recommended.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^setselector | ^sts [--^file=<selector_file>] [--^ignorechanges]
|
|||
|
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
|
|||
|
[--^noinput]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^file File to load a selector from.
|
|||
|
--^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
|
|||
|
shown if there are pending changes detected when
|
|||
|
updating the workspace.
|
|||
|
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
|
|||
|
is redirected.
|
|||
|
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
|||
|
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace to set the selector.
|
|||
|
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about workspace specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SETSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command sets the selector of a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
A workspace needs information to load revisions from the repository.
|
|||
|
To get this information, Unity VCS uses a selector.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Using a selector, it is possible to load revisions from a given branch,
|
|||
|
label, or changeset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If a file to load the selector is not specified, the default Operating
|
|||
|
System editor will be executed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sample selector:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^repository "^default" // working repository
|
|||
|
- ^path "/" // rules will be applied to the root directory
|
|||
|
- ^branch "/^main" // obtain latest revisions from ^br:/^main
|
|||
|
- ^checkout "/^main" // place checkouts on branch ^br:/^main
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^sts
|
|||
|
(Opens the current selector file to be applied.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^sts ^wk:workspace_projA@reptest
|
|||
|
(Opens the specified selector file to be applied.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml
|
|||
|
(Sets the specified selector file in the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^setselector --^file=c:\selectors\sel.xml ^wk:MyWorkspace
|
|||
|
(Sets the specified selector file in the selected workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVE ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^shelveset instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Shelves the contents of checked-out items.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve [<item_path>+] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
|
|||
|
[-^c=str_comment | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=name] [--^comparisonmethod=comp_method]
|
|||
|
[--^summaryformat]
|
|||
|
(Shelves the contents.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve --^apply=<sh_spec> [--^mount]
|
|||
|
(Applies a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve --^delete=<sh_spec>
|
|||
|
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to be shelved, separated by spaces. Quotes (") can
|
|||
|
be used to specify paths containing spaces.
|
|||
|
--^all The items changed, moved and deleted locally, on the
|
|||
|
given paths, will also be included.
|
|||
|
--^dependencies Includes local change dependencies in the items to
|
|||
|
shelve.
|
|||
|
-^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelveset.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
|
|||
|
shelveset.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
|
|||
|
skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
|
|||
|
messages. For automation purposes.
|
|||
|
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
|||
|
--^delete Removes the specified shelveset.
|
|||
|
Shelveset specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
|||
|
--^apply Restores the shelved contents of the specified shelveset.
|
|||
|
Shelve specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHELVE ==
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelve will involve
|
|||
|
all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The shelve operation is always applied recursively from the given path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out or changed (--^all option must be used).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods:
|
|||
|
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
|||
|
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
(Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
|
|||
|
comment.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
|
|||
|
(Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
|
|||
|
commentshelve.txt file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve --^apply=^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Applies a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve --^delete=^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelve -
|
|||
|
(Shelves client changelist.
|
|||
|
The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
|
|||
|
'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
|
|||
|
shelve command.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage shelvesets.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^apply
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
|||
|
cm ^shelve ^apply ^sh:3
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Shelves pending changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^create | ^mk [<item_path>[ ...]] [--^all] [--^dependencies]
|
|||
|
[-^c=<str_comment> | -^commentsfile=<comments_file>]
|
|||
|
[--^summaryformat]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
item_path Items to shelve. Use a whitespace to separate user names.
|
|||
|
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing
|
|||
|
spaces.
|
|||
|
--^all The items changed, moved, and deleted locally, on the
|
|||
|
given paths, will also be included.
|
|||
|
--^dependencies Includes local change dependencies into the items to
|
|||
|
shelve.
|
|||
|
--^summaryformat Just prints the shelveset spec created for the main repo,
|
|||
|
skipping shelvesets of xlinked repos and any other output
|
|||
|
messages. For automation purposes.
|
|||
|
-^c Applies the specified comment to the created shelve.
|
|||
|
-^commentsfile Applies the comment in the specified file to the created
|
|||
|
shelve.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
The '^shelveset ^create' command stores the contents of checked out items inside the
|
|||
|
repository. This way the contents are protected without the need to
|
|||
|
checkin the files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If neither <item_path> nor any option is specified, the shelveset will
|
|||
|
include all the pending changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^shelveset ^create' operation is always applied recursively from the
|
|||
|
given path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements to shelve an item:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out or changed ('--^all' option must be used).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Set the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable to specify an editor for
|
|||
|
entering comments. If the PLASTICEDITOR environment variable is set, and
|
|||
|
the comment is empty, the editor will be automatically launched to allow
|
|||
|
you to specify the comment.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^create -^c="my comment"
|
|||
|
(Shelves all the pending changes in the current workspace including a
|
|||
|
comment.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset file1.txt "file 2.txt" -^commentsfile=commentshelve.txt
|
|||
|
(Shelves the selected pending changes and applies the comment in the
|
|||
|
'commentshelve.txt' file. Note, '^create' is the default subcommand.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^shelveset -
|
|||
|
(Shelves client changelist.
|
|||
|
The command above lists the paths in the changelist named
|
|||
|
'pending_to_review' and the path list is redirected to the input of the
|
|||
|
'^shelveset' command.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^delete | ^rm <sh_spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
The '^shelveset ^delete' command deletes a shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^delete ^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Removes a stored shelveset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
Applies a stored shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^apply <sh_spec> [<change_path>[ ...]] [--^preview]
|
|||
|
[--^mount] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^comparisonmethod=(^ignoreeol | ^ignorewhitespaces| \
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces | ^recognizeall)]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^preview Prints the changes to apply on the workspace without
|
|||
|
applying them
|
|||
|
--^mount The mount point for the given repository.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Specifies the output encoding, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^comparisonmethod Sets the comparison method. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
sh_spec Shelveset specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
|||
|
change_path The change path(s) of the shelve to apply. It's a
|
|||
|
server path, the one printed by the --preview option.
|
|||
|
When no path is set, all changes will be applied.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHELVESET_APPLY ==
|
|||
|
The '^shelveset ^apply' command restores the contents of a stored shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Comparison methods:
|
|||
|
^ignoreeol Ignores end of line differences.
|
|||
|
^ignorewhitespaces Ignores whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^ignoreeolandwhitespaces Ignores end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
^recognizeall Detects end of line and whitespace differences.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3
|
|||
|
(Applies a stored shelve.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^shelveset ^apply ^sh:3 /src/foo.c
|
|||
|
(Applies only the /src/foo.c change stored on the shelve.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
|||
|
Lists objects and attributes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showfindobjects <object>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^object Check remarks for available objects and attributes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOW_FIND_OBJECTS ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Available objects and attributes:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^attribute.
|
|||
|
- ^attributetype.
|
|||
|
- ^branch.
|
|||
|
- ^changeset.
|
|||
|
- ^label.
|
|||
|
- ^merge.
|
|||
|
- ^replicationlog.
|
|||
|
- ^review.
|
|||
|
- ^revision.
|
|||
|
- ^shelve.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^attribute:
|
|||
|
You can find attributes by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^type string.
|
|||
|
^value string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^srcobj object spec: item path, branch, changeset, revision, or label.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^type = 'status'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attributes of type 'status'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^this ^week'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attributes applied during the current week.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^value = 'resolved' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attributes with value 'resolved' applied by me.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^item:readme.txt'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the attributes applied to the item 'readme.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^br:/main/scm23343'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the attributes applied to the branch scm23343.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:readme.txt#^br:/main/task002'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^srcobj = '^rev:^revid:1126'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the attributes applied to the specified revision id.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^attributetype:
|
|||
|
You can find attribute types by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^name string.
|
|||
|
^value string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^source object spec: item path, branch, changeset or label.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify these objects.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^name ^like 'st%'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attribute where name starts with 'st'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attribute "^where ^date > '^today'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attributes applied today.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^comment != ''" --^xml
|
|||
|
(Finds all attribute types that have a comment and prints the
|
|||
|
output in XML format to the standard output.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^item:readme.txt'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attribute types in item 'readme.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^cs:30'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attribute types in changeset '30'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^attributetype "^where ^source = '^lb:v0.14.1'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all attribute types in label 'v0.14.1'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^branch:
|
|||
|
You can find branches by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^name string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^changesets date (of the changesets in the branch). Check "date constants"
|
|||
|
for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^attribute string.
|
|||
|
^attrvalue string.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^parent branch spec.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
|
|||
|
Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sorting fields:
|
|||
|
- ^date
|
|||
|
- ^branchname
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^name ^like 'scm23%'"
|
|||
|
(Finds branches which name starts with 'scm23'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
|
|||
|
(Finds branches created during the last week.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^changesets >= '^today'"
|
|||
|
(Finds branches with changesets created today.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue = 'failed'"
|
|||
|
(Finds branches that have the attribute 'status' and which
|
|||
|
value is 'failed'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^parent != '^br:/main'"
|
|||
|
(Finds branches created by other than me and which parent
|
|||
|
branch is not '/main'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^id = 2029607"
|
|||
|
(Finds the branch which id is 2029607.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^changeset:
|
|||
|
You can find changesets by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
|
|||
|
specify this object.
|
|||
|
^changesetid integer.
|
|||
|
^attribute string.
|
|||
|
^attrvalue string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^onlywithrevisions boolean. To filter whether a cset has revisions or not.
|
|||
|
^returnparent boolean. A way to return the parent of a cset. Good for scripting.
|
|||
|
^parent changeset id (integer).
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
|
|||
|
Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sorting fields:
|
|||
|
- ^date
|
|||
|
- ^changesetid
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^branch = '/main/scm23119'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all changesets in branch 'scm23119'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^attribute = 'status'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the changesets with the attribute 'status'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^date >= '6/8/2018' ^and ^owner != '^me'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all changesets with creation date equal or
|
|||
|
greater than 6/8/2018 and created by others than me.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^guid = '1b30674f-14cc-4fd7-962b-676c8a6f5cb6'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the changeset with the specified guid.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^comment = ''"
|
|||
|
(Finds the changesets with no comments.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^onlywithrevisions = 'false'"
|
|||
|
(Finds changesets with no revisions.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^changesetid = 29 ^and ^returnparent = 'true'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the parent of changeset 29.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changeset "^where ^parent = 548"
|
|||
|
(Finds all changesets which parent is cset 548.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^label:
|
|||
|
You can find labels by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^name string.
|
|||
|
^attribute string.
|
|||
|
^attrvalue string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
|
|||
|
specify this object.
|
|||
|
^branchid integer.
|
|||
|
^changeset changeset id (integer).
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
|
|||
|
Replication fields Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sorting fields:
|
|||
|
- ^date
|
|||
|
- ^labelname
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^name ^like '7.0.16.%'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the labels with a name that starts with '7.0.16.'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^date >= '^this ^month' ^and \
|
|||
|
^attribute = 'publish-status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'PUBLISHED'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the labels created this month with an attribute 'publish-status'
|
|||
|
set to a value other than 'PUBLISHED'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^branch = '/main'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all labels applied to the main branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^changeset = 111733"
|
|||
|
(Finds the labels applied to changeset 111733.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^merge:
|
|||
|
You can find merges by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^srcbranch branch spec.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
|||
|
^srcchangeset changeset id (integer).
|
|||
|
^dstbranch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
|
|||
|
specify this object.
|
|||
|
^dstchangeset changeset id (integer).
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^type string. Check possible values in "Type values" below.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^Type values:
|
|||
|
- ^merge
|
|||
|
- ^cherrypick
|
|||
|
- ^cherrypicksubstractive
|
|||
|
- ^interval
|
|||
|
- ^intervalcherrypick
|
|||
|
- ^intervalcherrypicksubstractive
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^srcbranch = '^br:/main'"
|
|||
|
(Finds merges from the main branch.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^dstchangeset = 108261" \
|
|||
|
--^format="{^srcbranch} {^srcchangeset} {^dstbranch} {^dstchangeset} {^owner}"
|
|||
|
(Finds the merges to changeset 108261 and prints the
|
|||
|
formatted output showing the source (branch and cset id),
|
|||
|
the destination (branch and cset id), and the merge owner.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^merge "^where ^type = '^cherrypick' ^and ^owner = '^me'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all my cherry picks.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^replicationlog:
|
|||
|
You can find replication log by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
|
|||
|
specify this object.
|
|||
|
^repositoryname string.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^server string.
|
|||
|
^package boolean.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^branch = '/main/gm22358'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the replication logs of branch 'gm22358'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^package = 'T' ^and ^server ^like '%cloud%'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the replication logs created from package which
|
|||
|
server name contains 'cloud'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^review:
|
|||
|
You can find code reviews by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^status string.
|
|||
|
^assignee string.
|
|||
|
^title string.
|
|||
|
^target object spec: branch or changeset.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to specify this object.
|
|||
|
^targetid integer.
|
|||
|
^targettype string. Check "target types" for more info.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
^order ^by field to use for sorting. Check "sorting fields" for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Target types:
|
|||
|
- ^branch
|
|||
|
- ^changeset
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sorting fields:
|
|||
|
- ^date
|
|||
|
- ^modifieddate
|
|||
|
- ^status
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^review "^where ^status = 'pending' ^and ^assignee = '^me'"
|
|||
|
(Finds all my pending reviews.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^review "^where ^target = '^br:/main/scm17932'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the reviews related to branch 'scm17932'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^review "^where ^targettype = '^changeset'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the reviews which target type is changeset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^revision:
|
|||
|
You can find revisions by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^branch branch spec. Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn how to
|
|||
|
specify this object.
|
|||
|
^changeset changeset id (integer).
|
|||
|
^item string or integer.
|
|||
|
^itemid integer.
|
|||
|
^attribute string.
|
|||
|
^attrvalue string.
|
|||
|
^archived boolean.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^parent revision id (integer).
|
|||
|
^returnparent boolean.
|
|||
|
^shelve shelve id (integer).
|
|||
|
^size integer (in bytes).
|
|||
|
^type string. Check "type values" for more info.
|
|||
|
^workspacecheckoutid integer.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^type values:
|
|||
|
- ^dir
|
|||
|
- ^bin
|
|||
|
- ^txt
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^changeset >= 111756"
|
|||
|
(Finds the revisions created in changeset 111756
|
|||
|
and later.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^itemid = 2250"
|
|||
|
(Finds the revisions of item 'readme.txt' plus
|
|||
|
item id 2250.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^item = 'readme.txt' ^or ^item = 2250"
|
|||
|
(Gets the same revisions as the previous example.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^attribute = 'status' ^and ^attrvalue != 'open'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the revisions with attribute 'status' which
|
|||
|
value is other than 'open'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^archived = 'true'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the revisions that are archived in an
|
|||
|
external storage.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^type = '^txt' and \
|
|||
|
^size > 300000 ^and ^owner = '^me' and ^date >= '2 ^months ^ago'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the text revisions created by me two months
|
|||
|
ago and with size greater than about 3MB.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^shelve:
|
|||
|
You can find shelves by filtering using the following fields:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^owner user. Admits special user '^me'.
|
|||
|
^date date. Check "date constants" for more info in this guide.
|
|||
|
^attribute string.
|
|||
|
^attrvalue string.
|
|||
|
^comment string.
|
|||
|
^GUID Global Unique Identifier.
|
|||
|
Hexadecimal id in the format xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx.
|
|||
|
^parent integer.
|
|||
|
^shelveid integer.
|
|||
|
^ID integer.
|
|||
|
Replication field Check "replication related fields" below.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
- ^ReplLogId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcDate
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcId
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcRepository
|
|||
|
- ^ReplSrcServer
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^owner != '^me' ^and ^date >= '^1 ^years ^ago'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the shelves created by others than me during the last
|
|||
|
year.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^shelveid = 2"
|
|||
|
(Finds the shelve with name 2.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^shelve "^where ^id >= 3848"
|
|||
|
(Finds the shelves which object id is greater than 3848.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Replication related fields:
|
|||
|
Many objects track replication data, meaning Unity VCS tracks where they were
|
|||
|
originally created.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The fields you can use are:
|
|||
|
^ReplSrcServer repspec. Stands for "replication source server".
|
|||
|
Server where the object was replicated from.
|
|||
|
^ReplSrcRepository string. Stands for "replication source repo". It is
|
|||
|
the repository where the object was replicated from.
|
|||
|
^ReplLogId integer. ID of the replication operation. In Unity VCS,
|
|||
|
each time new objects are created from a replica,
|
|||
|
a new 'replicationlog' is created.
|
|||
|
^ReplSrcDate date. It is the date when the replica actually took
|
|||
|
place.
|
|||
|
Replicated objects will retain its original creation
|
|||
|
date, o this field is useful if you want to find
|
|||
|
objects that where replicated within a specific
|
|||
|
timeframe.
|
|||
|
^ReplSrcId integer. It is the ID of the replication source server.
|
|||
|
You can discover this ID searching for
|
|||
|
'^replicationsource' objects with the 'cm ^find' command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver='skull.codicefactory.com:9095'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^replsrcserver = 'skull.codicefactory.com:9095' \
|
|||
|
^and ^replsrcrepository = 'codice'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the branches replicated from server 'skull'
|
|||
|
and from repository 'codice'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^revision "^where ^repllogid = 2019974"
|
|||
|
(Finds the revisions replicated from replica 2019974.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^label "^where ^replsrcdate >= '^one ^month ^ago' \
|
|||
|
^and ^date >= '15 ^days ^ago'"
|
|||
|
(Finds the labels created 15 days ago and were
|
|||
|
replicated one month ago.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^replicationlog "^where ^date > '^one ^week ^ago'"
|
|||
|
(returns the following line:)
|
|||
|
- 8780433 27/09/2018 8:49:38 codice@BACKYARD:8087 F mbarriosc
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
(Finds the replication logs created one week ago. Now, you can
|
|||
|
check that the replicated branch was created before it was
|
|||
|
replicated over:)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^branch "^where ^repllogid = 8780433"
|
|||
|
(returns the following line:)
|
|||
|
- 8780443 26/09/2018 12:20:55 /main/scm23078 maria codice T
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^replicationsource
|
|||
|
(returns the following two lines:)
|
|||
|
- 7860739 codice@AFRODITA:8087 d9c4372a-dc55-4fdc-ad3d-baeb2e975f27
|
|||
|
- 8175854 codice@BACKYARD:8087 66700d3a-036b-4b9a-a26f-adfc336b14f9
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
(Now, you can find the changesets replicated from codice@AFRODITA:8087:)
|
|||
|
cm ^find ^changesets "^where ^replsrcid = 7860739"
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Date constants:
|
|||
|
You can use date formats that follow your machine localization settings.
|
|||
|
For example, if your computer displays dates in the format 'MM-dd-yyyy',
|
|||
|
you can use dates such as '12-31-2019' in your queries.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can also use the following constants to simplify your queries:
|
|||
|
'^today' today's date.
|
|||
|
'^yesterday' yesterday's date.
|
|||
|
'^this ^week' current week's Monday date.
|
|||
|
'^this ^month' current month's 1st day date.
|
|||
|
'^this ^year' current year's January 1st date.
|
|||
|
'^one ^day ^ago' one day before the current date.
|
|||
|
'^one ^week ^ago' seven days before the current date.
|
|||
|
'^one ^month ^ago' one month before the current date.
|
|||
|
'n ^days ^ago' 'n' days before the current date.
|
|||
|
'n ^months ^ago' 'n' months before the current date.
|
|||
|
'n ^years ^ago' 'n' years before the current date.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The following '^where' clauses are valid for fields of type '^date':
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date > '^today' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date < '^yesterday' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^week' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date > '^this ^month' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^day ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^days ^ago' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^week ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^weeks ^ago' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date < '^one ^month ^ago' ^and ^date > '3 ^months ^ago' (...)'
|
|||
|
- '(...) ^where ^date > '1 ^year ^ago' (...)'
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
You can also force a specific date format on the 'cm ^find' command using the
|
|||
|
--^dateformat flag. Check 'cm ^find --^help' for further details.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
|||
|
Displays available trigger types.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^showtypes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER_SHOWTYPES ==
|
|||
|
Displays the list of available trigger types.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger ^showtypes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWACL ==
|
|||
|
Shows the ACL of an object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWACL ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showacl | ^sa <object_spec> [--^extended] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^extended Shows ACL hierarchy tree.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the '--^xml' option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
object_spec Specification of the object to show the ACL of.
|
|||
|
The valid objects for this command are:
|
|||
|
repserver, repository, branch, changeset, label, item,
|
|||
|
and attribute.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOWACL ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showacl ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
|
|||
|
(Shows the ACL of the selected server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^sa ^br:/main --^extended
|
|||
|
(Shows the ACL hierarchy tree of the selected branch specification.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
|||
|
Shows all the available commands.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showcommands
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOWCOMMANDS ==
|
|||
|
Bear in mind that there might be deprecated commands not displayed here
|
|||
|
but which functionallity remains due to retrocompatibility reasons.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Shows the owner of an object.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showowner | ^so <object_spec>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
object_spec Specification of the object to show the owner of.
|
|||
|
The object must be one of the following:
|
|||
|
repository server, repository, branch, changeset,
|
|||
|
label, attribute, revision, and item.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOWOWNER ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command displays the owner of an object. The owner can be a user or
|
|||
|
a group. The owner can be modified with 'cm ^setowner' command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showowner ^repserver:PlasticServer:8084
|
|||
|
(Shows the owner of the selected server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^so ^item:samples\
|
|||
|
(Shows the owner of the selected item specification.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
|||
|
Lists the available permissions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showpermissions | ^sp
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOWPERMISSIONS ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showpermissions
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.**
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Shows the workspace selector.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Selectors are discontinued and its use is not recommended.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showselector | ^ss [<wk_path> | <wk_spec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace to show the selector.
|
|||
|
wk_spec Workspace specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about workspace specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SHOWSELECTOR ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If neither path nor workspace spec is specified, the command will take the
|
|||
|
current directory as the workspace path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showselector c:\workspace
|
|||
|
(Shows the selector for the selected workspace path.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^ss
|
|||
|
(Shows the selector for current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showselector > mySelector.txt
|
|||
|
(Writes into a file the selector for the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^showselector ^wk:mywk@reptest
|
|||
|
(Shows the selector for the workspace 'mywk' in the repository 'reptest'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to perform support related operations.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^support <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^bundle
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^support <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^support <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SUPPORT ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^support
|
|||
|
cm ^support ^bundle
|
|||
|
cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a "support bundle" package with relevant logs.
|
|||
|
You can attach the file while requesting help, asking for extra info, or
|
|||
|
submitting a bug.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^support ^bundle [<outputfile>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
outputfile Creates the "support bundle" package at the specified
|
|||
|
location.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SUPPORT_BUNDLE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to create a "support bundle" package which can be
|
|||
|
attached when requesting help, asking for extra info, or submitting a bug.
|
|||
|
The user can optionally specify a location for the output file; otherwise, the
|
|||
|
output file will be written to the temp directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^support ^bundle
|
|||
|
(Creates "support bundle" in temp directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^support ^bundle c:\outputfile.zip
|
|||
|
(Creates "support bundle" at the specified location.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Switches the workspace to a branch, changeset, label, or shelveset.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch (<brspec> | <csetspec> | <lbspec> | <shspec>)
|
|||
|
[--^workspace=<path>] [--^repository=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^forcedetailedprogress]
|
|||
|
[--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^workspace Path where the workspace is located.
|
|||
|
--^repository Switches to the specified repository.
|
|||
|
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard
|
|||
|
output is redirected.
|
|||
|
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
|||
|
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
|||
|
--^verbose Shows additional information.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
brspec Target branch.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
csetspec Target changeset.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset specs.)
|
|||
|
lbspec Target label.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label specs.)
|
|||
|
shspec Target shelveset.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about shelveset specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SWITCH ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to update the workspace tree to the contents
|
|||
|
of the specified object (branch, label, shelveset, or changeset).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:/main
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^lb:Rel1.1
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^br:/main/scm002 --^repository=rep2
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^cs:4375
|
|||
|
cm ^switch ^sh:2
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
> **This command is deprecated.** Use cm ^switch instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Sets a branch as the working branch.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switchtobranch [options] [branch_spec]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^label=name | --^changeset=number load revisions from the specified
|
|||
|
label or changeset. One of these options
|
|||
|
is required if no branch_spec is given.
|
|||
|
--^changeset=cset Switch to the specified changeset.
|
|||
|
--^repository=rep Switch to the specified repository.
|
|||
|
--^workspace | -wk=path path where the workspace is located.
|
|||
|
branch_spec Branch specification.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SWITCH_TO_BRANCH ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to work in a branch.
|
|||
|
If no branch_spec specified, a label or a changeset must be specified.
|
|||
|
If no repository is specified, the branch is set to the current repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main
|
|||
|
cm ^switchtobranch ^br:/main/task001
|
|||
|
cm ^switchtobranch --^label=BL050
|
|||
|
(Read-only configuration. The command loads the contents of the labeled
|
|||
|
changeset.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_SYNC ==
|
|||
|
Synchronize with Git.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_SYNC ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^synchronize | ^sync <repspec> ^git [<url> [--^user=<usr_name> --^pwd=<pwd>]]
|
|||
|
[(--^txtsimilaritypercent | --^binsimilaritypercent | \
|
|||
|
--^dirsimilaritypercent)=<value>]
|
|||
|
[--^author] [--^skipgitlfs] [--^gitpushchunk=<value>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^user User name for the specified URL.
|
|||
|
--^pwd Password for the specified URL.
|
|||
|
--^txtsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two text files
|
|||
|
are the same (moved item)
|
|||
|
--^binsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two binary files
|
|||
|
are the same (moved item)
|
|||
|
--^dirsimilaritypercent Similarity percentage to consider two directories
|
|||
|
are the same (moved item)
|
|||
|
--^author Uses name and timestamp values from the git author.
|
|||
|
(git committer by default)
|
|||
|
--^skipgitlfs Ignores the Git LFS configuration in the
|
|||
|
.gitattributes file. It acts like without Git LFS
|
|||
|
support.
|
|||
|
--^gitpushchunk Process the push operation (exporting changes from
|
|||
|
Unity VCS to Git) in chunks of a certain number of
|
|||
|
changesets. This is only useful for huge repos to
|
|||
|
avoid network or package size related issues or
|
|||
|
just for debugging purposes. It uses chunks of
|
|||
|
1000 changesets if no value is specified.
|
|||
|
url Remote repository URL (http(s):// or git:// or a
|
|||
|
SSH URL).
|
|||
|
repspec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' t
|
|||
|
learn more about repository specs.)
|
|||
|
git (Default).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_SYNC ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If the git repository requires user and password, then use '^url', '--^user',
|
|||
|
and '--^pwd' options.
|
|||
|
- If the git repository doesn't require user and password, then use '^url'
|
|||
|
option with the first sync operation. With next sync operations, '^url'
|
|||
|
option is optional.
|
|||
|
- To use the SSH protocol to perform the sync, you must have the 'ssh' client
|
|||
|
added to the PATH environment variable and properly configured to connect
|
|||
|
to the remote host (i.e. private/public keys configured).
|
|||
|
- Similarity works the same way as the Unity VCS GUI does.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^sync default@localhost:8087 ^git git://localhost/repository
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TRIGGER ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage triggers.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TRIGGER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger | ^tr <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^edit
|
|||
|
- ^list | ^ls
|
|||
|
- ^showtypes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^trigger <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TRIGGER ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^mk ^before-mklabel new "/path/to/script" --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^edit ^before-mklabel 7 --^position=4 --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^ls ^before-mkbranch --^server=myserver:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^rm ^after-setselector 4
|
|||
|
cm ^tr ^showtypes
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_TUBE ==
|
|||
|
Runs commands related to Plastic Tube.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_TUBE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^config -^u=<user> -^p=<password>
|
|||
|
(Configures Unity VCS to use Plastic Tube with the specified user and
|
|||
|
password.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^create <remoteuser>
|
|||
|
(Creates the tube "remoteuser -> myuser". The user "myuser" allows to
|
|||
|
"remoteuser" to connect to "myuser" server. Connections can be established
|
|||
|
from "remoteuser" to "myuser". Only tubes from other users to the current
|
|||
|
tube user can be created.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^remove <remoteuser>
|
|||
|
(Removes the tube "remoteuser -> myuser".)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^local
|
|||
|
(Lists the local repositories shared in the local server and the users
|
|||
|
that it is shared with.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^remote
|
|||
|
(Lists the shared remote repositories that are shared with the current
|
|||
|
tube user.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^share <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser> -^a=(^pull | ^push | ^pull,^push)
|
|||
|
(Shares the local repository(s) with the remote user and sets the specified
|
|||
|
access mode. Use a whitespace to separate repository specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^unshare <rep_spec>[ ...] -^u=<remoteuser>
|
|||
|
(Unshares the local repository(s) with the remote user. Use a whitespace to
|
|||
|
separate repository specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^connect
|
|||
|
(Connects the Unity VCS server to Plastic Tube.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^disconnect
|
|||
|
(Disconnects the Unity VCS server from Plastic Tube.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^status
|
|||
|
(Shows if the Unity VCS server is connected to Plastic Tube.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^u Tube user (the plasticscm.com user).
|
|||
|
-^p User password.
|
|||
|
-^a Sets the access mode.
|
|||
|
rep_spec Repository specification. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about repository specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_TUBE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Use the 'cm ^tube' command to manage Plastic Tube.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^config -^u=ruben@codicesoftware.com -^p=rubenpassword
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^create pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
|||
|
('pablo@codicesoftware.com' can connect to the current Plastic Tube user)
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^remove pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^local
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^remote
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^pull,^push
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^share repo@server:8087 doc@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com -^a=^push
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^unshare repo@server:8087 -^u=pablo@codicesoftware.com
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^connect
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^disconnect
|
|||
|
cm ^tube ^status
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Undoes the checkout of an item.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undocheckout | ^unco <item_path>[ ...] [-^a | --^all] [--^symlink] [--^silent]
|
|||
|
[--^keepchanges | -^k]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^a | --^all Undoes all of the changes in the specified items. If
|
|||
|
the item(s) were checked out, the checkout will be
|
|||
|
reverted. If the item(s) were locally modified, the
|
|||
|
modifications will be reverted.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the undocheckout operation to the link and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
--^keepchanges | -^k Undoes the checkout and preserves the local changes.
|
|||
|
Sample: undo the checkout of a file leave it as locally
|
|||
|
changed with the same content on disk that it was.
|
|||
|
This option cannot be used with dynamic workspaces.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to
|
|||
|
the current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UNDOCHECKOUT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If an item is checked out and you do not want to checkin it, you can undo
|
|||
|
the checkout using this command. Both files and folders can be unchecked
|
|||
|
out. The item will be updated to the state it had before checking it out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Requirements:
|
|||
|
- The item must be under source code control.
|
|||
|
- The item must be checked out.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^undocheckout' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
|||
|
single dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^undocheckout ^checkin -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo the checkout.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undocheckout --^all -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, undoes the checkout of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undocheckout .
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undocheckout file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^unco c:\workspace\file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts of the selected files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unco -^a file1.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts or local modifications of 'file1.txt')
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unco link --^symlink
|
|||
|
(Applies the undocheckout operation to the symlink file and not to the target.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^undocheckout -
|
|||
|
(Undoes client changelist. The command above will list the paths in the
|
|||
|
changelist named 'pending_to_review' and the path list will be redirected
|
|||
|
to the input of the undocheckout command).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unco . --^machinereadable
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
|
|||
|
simplified, easier-to-parse format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unco . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">" --^endlineseparator="<" \
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator=","
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts in the current directory, and prints the result in a
|
|||
|
simplified, easier to parse format, starting and ending the lines, and
|
|||
|
separating the fields, with the specified strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
Undoes non-changed checked out items.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^uncounchanged | ^unuc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
[--^symlink] [--^silent]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Undoes unchanged items recursively in the specified paths.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the uncounchanged operation to the link and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to current
|
|||
|
directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UNDOCHECKOUTUNCHANGED ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is applied from the root of the workspace recursively.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^uncounchanged' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
|||
|
single dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example: cm ^uncounchanged -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which unchanged files to undo
|
|||
|
the checkout.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^uncounchanged -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, undoes the checkout on all unchanged .c files in the
|
|||
|
workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^uncounchanged . -^R
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unuc /home/myuser/mywk/project/templates -^R
|
|||
|
(Undoes checkouts of not changed files recursively on the selected directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDELETE ==
|
|||
|
Undeletes an item using a specific revision.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UNDELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undelete <revspec> <path>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
revspec Specification of the revision whose contents will
|
|||
|
be loaded in the workspace. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about revision specs.)
|
|||
|
path Restore path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UNDELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The item to undelete should not be already loaded in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^undelete' operation is not supported for xlinks.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undelete ^revid:756 C:\mywks\src\foo.c
|
|||
|
cm ^undelete ^itemid:68#^cs:2 C:\mywks\dir\myfile.pdf
|
|||
|
cm ^undelete ^serverpath:/src#^br:/main C:\mywks\Dir
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
|||
|
Undoes the changes on a path.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undochange | ^unc <item_path>[ ...] [-^R | -^r | --^recursive]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^R | -^r | --^recursive Applies the operation recursively.
|
|||
|
item_path Items to apply the operation. Use a whitespace to separate
|
|||
|
paths. Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths
|
|||
|
containing spaces. Use . to apply the operation to
|
|||
|
the current directory.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UNDOCHANGE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If an item is checked out or modified but not checked in and you do not
|
|||
|
want to check it in, you can undo the changes using this command. The item
|
|||
|
will be updated to the contents it had before.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Reading input from stdin:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^undochange' command can read paths from stdin. To do this, pass a
|
|||
|
single dash "-".
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
cm ^undochange -
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Paths will be read until an empty line is entered.
|
|||
|
This allows you to use pipe to specify for which files to undo changes.
|
|||
|
Example:
|
|||
|
dir /S /B *.c | cm ^undochange -
|
|||
|
(In Windows, undoes the changes of all .c files in the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unc .
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes of the files on the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undochange . -^R
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes of the files recursively on the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unc file1.txt "file 2.txt"
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes of the selected files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^unc c:\workspace\file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes of the selected file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Undoes changes in a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo [<path> [...]] [--^symlink] [-^r | --^recursive] [<filter> [...]]
|
|||
|
[--^silent | [--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the undo operation to the symlink and not
|
|||
|
to the target.
|
|||
|
-^r Executes the undo recursively.
|
|||
|
--^silent Does not show any output.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag, specifies
|
|||
|
how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
path Path of the files or directories to apply the operation to.
|
|||
|
Use double quotes (" ") to specify paths containing spaces.
|
|||
|
Use a whitespace to separate paths.
|
|||
|
If no path is specified, by default the undo operation will take
|
|||
|
all of the files in the current directory.
|
|||
|
filter Applies the specified filter or filters to the given paths. Use
|
|||
|
a whitespace to separate filters. See the Filters section for
|
|||
|
more information.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UNDO ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If no path is specified, it will undo every change in the current
|
|||
|
directory but not recursively.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If one or more paths are specified, it will undo every change in the
|
|||
|
specified paths but not recursively.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- If you want the operation to be recursive, you must specify the '-^r' flag.
|
|||
|
To undo all of the changes below a directory including changes affecting
|
|||
|
the directory itself, run the following command:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo dirpath -^r
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If dirpath is a workspace path, every change in the workspace will be
|
|||
|
undone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- The '^undo' command is dangerous because it undoes work irreversibly.
|
|||
|
Once the ^undo has finished, it is not possible to recover the previous
|
|||
|
state of the files and directories affected by it.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Consider the following scenario:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- /src
|
|||
|
- file.txt
|
|||
|
- code.cs
|
|||
|
- /test
|
|||
|
- test_a.py
|
|||
|
- test_b.py
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These commands are equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
|||
|
cm ^undo
|
|||
|
cm ^undo *
|
|||
|
cm ^undo file.txt code.cs /test
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
These commands are also equivalent when executed from the /src directory:
|
|||
|
cm ^undo .
|
|||
|
cm ^undo /src file.txt code.cs
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Filters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The paths can be filtered using one or more of the filters below. Each of
|
|||
|
those filters refers to a type of change:
|
|||
|
--^checkedout Selects checked-out files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^unchanged Selects files whose content is unchanged.
|
|||
|
--^changed Selects locally changed or checked-out files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^deleted Selects deleted files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^moved Selects moved files and directories.
|
|||
|
--^added Selects added files and directories.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If the path matches one or more of the specified kinds of changes, those
|
|||
|
types of changes will be undone on that said path.
|
|||
|
For example, if you specify both '--^checkedout' and '--^moved', if a file
|
|||
|
is both checkedout and moved, both changes will be undone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If no filter is specified, all kinds of changes are undone.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo .
|
|||
|
(Undoes all changes in the current directory.
|
|||
|
It won't undo changes within its subdirectories.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo . -^r
|
|||
|
(Undoes all changes in the current directory recursively. If executed
|
|||
|
from the workspace's root, undoes all changes in the entire workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^co file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes the checkout on 'file.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo c:\otherworkspace\file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes in file 'file.txt' located in a workspace other than the
|
|||
|
current one.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undoes the local change to 'file.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo src
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes to the src directory and its files.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo src/*
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes in every file and directory contained in src, without
|
|||
|
affecting src.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo *.cs
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes to every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
|||
|
directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^undo *.cs -^r
|
|||
|
(Undoes changes on every file or directory that matches *.cs in the current
|
|||
|
directory and every directory below it.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^co file1.txt file2.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo --^unchanged
|
|||
|
(Undoes the checkout of unchanged 'file2.txt', ignoring locally changed
|
|||
|
'file1.txt'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file1.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^co file1.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo --^checkedout
|
|||
|
(Undoes the changes in checked-out file 'file1.txt', ignoring 'file2.txt' as
|
|||
|
it is not checked-out.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^add file.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo file.txt
|
|||
|
(Undo the add of 'file.txt' making it once again a private file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
^rm file1.txt
|
|||
|
^echo ^content >> file2.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^add file3.txt
|
|||
|
cm ^undo --^deleted --^added *
|
|||
|
(Undoes the 'file1.txt' delete and 'file3.txt' add, ignoring the 'file2.txt'
|
|||
|
change.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
|||
|
Undoes item locks on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock <itemspec>[ ...] [--^remove]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
--^remove Removes the locks completely for the specified items.
|
|||
|
If this option is not specified, it only releases the
|
|||
|
Locked status.
|
|||
|
itemspec One or more item specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about itemspecs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOCK_UNLOCK ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Only the administrator of the server can run the 'cm ^unlock --^remove'
|
|||
|
command to delete locks.
|
|||
|
- Only the administrator can release locks that belong to other users.
|
|||
|
Users can release their own locks.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep@DIGITALIS:8084
|
|||
|
(Releases the lock for the item id 56 in the repo 'myrep@DIGITALIS'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^item:/home/user/workspace/foo.psd ^item:/home/user/workspace/bar.psd
|
|||
|
(Releases the selected item locks.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^unlock ^itemid:56@myrep ^itemid:89@myrep --^remove
|
|||
|
(Removes the selected items locks.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_LOCK_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Create item locks on a server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_LOCK_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^create | ^mk <branchspec> <itemspec>[ ...]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
branchspec The branch where the locks will be created.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about branchspecs.)
|
|||
|
itemspec One or more item specs. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec'
|
|||
|
to learn more about itemspecs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_LOCK_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- Only the administrator can create locks.
|
|||
|
- All locks created with this command are created in Retained status.
|
|||
|
- If the revision loaded in the specified branch (for each item) is the
|
|||
|
same loaded in the lock destination branch (/main by default),
|
|||
|
then no lock is created.
|
|||
|
- The repspec or the branchspec must be the same of all the itemspecs
|
|||
|
specified.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^create /main/task@myrep ^itemid:56@myrep
|
|||
|
(Creates a lock for the item id 56 in the branch /main/task@myrep.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^lock ^create br:/main/task item:/workspace/foo.psd ^item:/workspace/bar.psd
|
|||
|
(Creates a lock for the selected item in the branch /main/task.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Updates the workspace and downloads latest changes.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update [<item_path> | --^last]
|
|||
|
[--^changeset=<csetspec>] [--^cloaked] [--^dontmerge] [--^forced]
|
|||
|
[--^ignorechanges] [--^override] [--^recursewk] [--^skipchangedcheck]
|
|||
|
[--^silent] [--^verbose] [--^xml[=<output_file>]] [--^encoding=<name>]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=<sep>]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=<sep>] [--^fieldseparator=<sep>]]
|
|||
|
[--^forcedetailedprogress] [--^noinput]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^changeset Updates the workspace to a specific changeset.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about
|
|||
|
changeset specs.)
|
|||
|
--^cloaked Includes the cloaked items in the update operation.
|
|||
|
If this option is not specified, those items that are
|
|||
|
cloaked will be ignored in the operation.
|
|||
|
--^dontmerge In case an update merge is required during the update
|
|||
|
operation, does not perform it.
|
|||
|
--^forced Forces updating items to the revision specified in
|
|||
|
the selector.
|
|||
|
--^ignorechanges Ignores the pending changes warning message that is
|
|||
|
shown if there are pending changes detected when
|
|||
|
updating the workspace.
|
|||
|
--^noinput Skips the interactive questions to continue the
|
|||
|
operation with pending changes or to shelve them.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^override Overrides changed files outside Unity VCS control.
|
|||
|
Their content will be overwritten with the server
|
|||
|
content.
|
|||
|
--^recursewk Updates all the workspaces found within the current
|
|||
|
path. Useful to update all the workspaces contained
|
|||
|
in a specific path.
|
|||
|
--^skipchangedcheck Checks if there are local changes in your workspace
|
|||
|
before starting. If you always checkout before
|
|||
|
modifying a file, you can use this check and speed
|
|||
|
up the operation.
|
|||
|
--^silent No output is shown unless an error happens.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^verbose Shows additional information.
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format,
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
Using this option disables the possibility of
|
|||
|
bringing your pending changes.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
--^forcedetailedprogress Forces detailed progress even when standard output
|
|||
|
is redirected.
|
|||
|
--^last Changes the workspace selector from a changeset
|
|||
|
configuration or a label configuration to a branch
|
|||
|
configuration before updating. The selector is changed
|
|||
|
to the branch the changeset or label belongs to.
|
|||
|
item_path Path to update. Use . to apply update to current directory.
|
|||
|
If no path is specified, then the current workspace is
|
|||
|
fully updated.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_UPDATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^update' command only downloads needed files.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The command assumes recursive operation.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When the '--^last' option is used, it is not necessary to specify a path.
|
|||
|
In this case, the workspace the current working directory belongs to will
|
|||
|
be updated. (Remember that specifying this flag could cause the workspace
|
|||
|
selector to be changed to a branch configuration if the selector was
|
|||
|
previously pointing to a changeset or a label.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update
|
|||
|
(Updates all in the current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update .
|
|||
|
(Updates current directory, and all children items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update . --^forced --^verbose
|
|||
|
(Forces retrieval of all revisions.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update --^last
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^update . --^machinereadable --^startlineseparator=">"
|
|||
|
(Updates current directory and prints the result in a simplified
|
|||
|
easier-to-parse format, starting the lines with the specified
|
|||
|
strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_VERSION ==
|
|||
|
Shows the current client version number.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_VERSION ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^version
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_VERSION ==
|
|||
|
Shows the current client version number.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WHOAMI ==
|
|||
|
Shows the current Unity VCS user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WHOAMI ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^whoami
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WHOAMI ==
|
|||
|
Shows the current Unity VCS user.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to manage workspaces.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^list | ^ls
|
|||
|
- ^create | ^mk
|
|||
|
- ^delete | ^rm
|
|||
|
- ^move | ^mv
|
|||
|
- ^rename
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^create myWorkspace wk_path
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^list
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^delete myWorkspace
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Creates a new workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <rep_spec>
|
|||
|
[^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [<rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
[^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> [--^selector[=<selector_file>]
|
|||
|
(Creates a new workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^create | ^mk] <wk_name> <wk_path> --^dynamic --^tree=[<tree>]
|
|||
|
(Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still experimental, and it's
|
|||
|
only available for Windows.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^selector Edits a selector for the new workspace.
|
|||
|
If a selector file is specified, then sets the selector
|
|||
|
for the new workspace from the specified file.
|
|||
|
--^dynamic Creates a dynamic workspace. This feature is still
|
|||
|
experimental, and it's only available for Windows.
|
|||
|
Specifying this flag requires using the --^tree parameter.
|
|||
|
--^tree Used with the '--^dynamic' flag, specifies the initial
|
|||
|
point the dynamic workspace is going to load. It can
|
|||
|
either be a branch, changeset, or label specification.
|
|||
|
The workspace will later on use the repository in the
|
|||
|
spec. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
wk_name The new workspace name.
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the new workspace.
|
|||
|
rep_spec Creates the new workspace with the specified repository.
|
|||
|
Repository specification: check 'cm ^help ^objectspec'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_CREATE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- A workspace is a view of the repository mapped to the local filesystem.
|
|||
|
The workspace selector defines the rules that specify workspace content.
|
|||
|
Use 'cm ^showselector' to display a workspace selector or 'cm ^setselector'
|
|||
|
to modify it.
|
|||
|
- If neither rep_spec nor '--^selector' is specified, then the workspace
|
|||
|
will automatically be configured to use the first repository
|
|||
|
(alphabetically) of the server configured in the client.conf file.
|
|||
|
- The dynamic workspaces is a experimental feature (Windows only), and it
|
|||
|
requires the plasticfs.exe program running.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^create mycode
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^mk mycode
|
|||
|
(Creates a 'mycode' workspace pointing to the repository with the same name.
|
|||
|
The workspace directory will be created under the current directory.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^mk mycode@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^mk mycode@myorganization@cloud
|
|||
|
(Creates a 'mycode' workspace as before, but you can specify different repository server.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^create myworkspace c:\workspace
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^mk myworkspace /home/john/plastic_view
|
|||
|
(Creates 'myworkspace' workspace in Windows and in Linux respectively.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk mywktest c:\wks\wktest --^selector=myselector.txt
|
|||
|
(Creates 'mywktest' workspace using the selector in 'myselector.txt' file.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk mywkprj c:\wks\wkprj myrep@^repserver:localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Creates 'mywkprj' workspace with the selected repository.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk mywkprj c:\dynwks\mywkprj --^dynamic --^tree=^br:/main@myrep@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Creates dynamic 'mywkprj' workspace with the 'myrep@localhost:8084'
|
|||
|
repository, pointing to '^br:/main' the first time it gets mounted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Deletes a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^delete | ^rm [<wk_path> | <wkspec>] [--^keepmetadata]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^keepmetadata Does not delete the metadata files in the .plastic
|
|||
|
folder.
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace to be deleted.
|
|||
|
wkspec Specification of the workspace to delete. (Use
|
|||
|
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_DELETE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command deletes a workspace, specified by path or spec.
|
|||
|
If no arguments are specified, current workspace will be assumed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^delete
|
|||
|
(Removes current workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^delete c:\workspace
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace rm /home/danipen/wks
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^rm ^wk:MiWorkspace@DIGITALIS
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Lists workspaces.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk [^list | ^ls] [--^format=<str_format>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^format Retrieves the output message in a specific format. See
|
|||
|
Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_LIST ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Output format parameters (--^format option):
|
|||
|
This command accepts a format string to show the output.
|
|||
|
The output parameters of this command are the following:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
{0} | {^wkname} Workspace name.
|
|||
|
{1} | {^machine} Client machine name.
|
|||
|
{2} | {^path} Workspace path.
|
|||
|
{3} | {^wkid} Workspace unique identifier.
|
|||
|
{4} | {^wkspec} Workspace specification using the format:
|
|||
|
'wkname@machine'.
|
|||
|
{^tab} Inserts a tab space.
|
|||
|
{^newline} Inserts a new line.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk
|
|||
|
(Lists all workspaces.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^list --^format={0}#{3,40}
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^list --^format={^wkname}#{^wkid,40}
|
|||
|
(Lists all workspaces and shows the workspace name, a # symbol and the
|
|||
|
workspace GUID field in 40 spaces, aligned to left.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {0} in path {2}"
|
|||
|
cm ^wk --^format="Workspace {^wkname} in path {^path}"
|
|||
|
(Lists all workspaces and shows result as formatted strings.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Moves a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^move | ^mv [<wkspec>] <new_path>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
wkspec Specification of the workspace to move. (Use
|
|||
|
'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about specs.)
|
|||
|
new_path Workspace will be moved to here.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_MOVE ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command allows users to move a workspace to another location on disk.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^move myWorkspace \new\workspaceDirectory
|
|||
|
(Moves 'myWorkspace' to the specified location.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^mv c:\users\maria\wkspaces\newlocation
|
|||
|
(Moves the current workspace to the new location.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Renames a workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace | ^wk ^rename [<wk_name>] <new_name>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
wk_name Workspace to rename.
|
|||
|
new_name New name for the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACE_RENAME ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command renames a workspace.
|
|||
|
If no workspace name is supplied, the current workspace will be used.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^workspace ^rename mywk1 wk2
|
|||
|
(Renames the workspace 'mywk1' to 'wk2'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^wk ^rename newname
|
|||
|
(Renames the current workspace to 'newname'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Shows changes in the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status [<wk_path>] [--^changelist[=<name>] | --^changelists] [--^cutignored]
|
|||
|
[ --^header] [ --^noheader] [ --^nomergesinfo] [ --^head]
|
|||
|
[--^short] [--^symlink] [ --^dirwithchanges] [--^xml[=<output_file>]]
|
|||
|
[--^encoding=<name>] [ --^wrp | --^wkrootrelativepaths]
|
|||
|
[--^fullpaths | --^fp] [<legacy_options>] [<search_types>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
[--^pretty]
|
|||
|
[--^machinereadable [--^startlineseparator=sep]
|
|||
|
[--^endlineseparator=sep] [--^fieldseparator=sep]]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^changelist Shows changes in the selected changelist.
|
|||
|
--^changelists Shows changes grouped in client changelists.
|
|||
|
--^cutignored Skips the contents of ignored directories.
|
|||
|
Requires the '--^ignored' search type. See the Search
|
|||
|
types section for more information.
|
|||
|
--^header Only prints the workspace status.
|
|||
|
--^noheader Only prints the modified item search result.
|
|||
|
--^nomergesinfo Doesn't print the merge info for changes.
|
|||
|
--^head Prints the status of the last changeset on the branch.
|
|||
|
--^short Lists only paths that contains changes.
|
|||
|
--^symlink Applies the operation to the symlink and not to the
|
|||
|
target.
|
|||
|
--^dirwithchanges Shows directories that contain changes inside them
|
|||
|
(added, moved, removed items inside).
|
|||
|
--^xml Prints the output in XML format to the standard output.
|
|||
|
It is possible to specify an output file.
|
|||
|
--^pretty Prints workspace changes in a nice table format.
|
|||
|
--^encoding Used with the --^xml option, specifies the encoding to
|
|||
|
use in the XML output, i.e.: utf-8.
|
|||
|
See the MSDN documentation at
|
|||
|
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/system.text.encoding.aspx
|
|||
|
to get the table of supported encodings and its format
|
|||
|
(at the end of the page, in the "Name" column).
|
|||
|
--^wrp Print workspace root relative paths instead of
|
|||
|
current directory relative paths.
|
|||
|
--^fullpaths, --^fp Force printing absolute paths, overriding any other
|
|||
|
path printing setting.
|
|||
|
--^machinereadable Outputs the result in an easy-to-parse format.
|
|||
|
--^startlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should start.
|
|||
|
--^endlineseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the lines should end.
|
|||
|
--^fieldseparator Used with the '--^machinereadable' flag,
|
|||
|
specifies how the fields should be separated.
|
|||
|
--^iscochanged Shows whether contents of a checked-out file have
|
|||
|
changed or not. This flag is only available with
|
|||
|
"--^compact", "--^xml" and "--^machinereadable" options.
|
|||
|
If this flag is not set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
|
|||
|
"--^machinereadable" options will show just "^CO"
|
|||
|
status for a checked-out file with its contents
|
|||
|
changed.
|
|||
|
If this flag is set, the "--^compact", "--^xml" or
|
|||
|
"--^machinereadable" options will show "^CO+CH" status
|
|||
|
for a checked-out file with its contents changed.
|
|||
|
wk_path Path of the workspace where the search will be
|
|||
|
performed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Legacy options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^cset Prints the workspace status in the legacy format.
|
|||
|
--^compact Prints the workspace status and changelists in the
|
|||
|
legacy format.
|
|||
|
--^noheaders When used in conjunction with the '--^compact' flag, the
|
|||
|
changelist headers will not be printed. (Does not apply
|
|||
|
to the new changelists format.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Search types:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^added Prints added items.
|
|||
|
--^checkout Prints checkedout items.
|
|||
|
--^changed Prints changed items.
|
|||
|
--^copied Prints copied items.
|
|||
|
--^replaced Prints replaced items.
|
|||
|
--^deleted Prints deleted items.
|
|||
|
--^localdeleted Prints locally deleted items.
|
|||
|
--^moved Prints moved items.
|
|||
|
--^localmoved Prints locally moved items.
|
|||
|
--^percentofsimilarity=<value> Percent of similarity between two files in
|
|||
|
order to consider them the same item. Used
|
|||
|
in the locally moved search. Its default
|
|||
|
value is 20%.
|
|||
|
--^txtsameext Only those text files that have the same
|
|||
|
extension will be taken into account by the
|
|||
|
similarity content matching process during
|
|||
|
the moved items search. By default, any
|
|||
|
text file will be processed.
|
|||
|
--^binanyext Any binary file will be taken into account
|
|||
|
by the similarity content matching process
|
|||
|
during the moved items search. By default,
|
|||
|
only those binary files that have the same
|
|||
|
extension will be processed.
|
|||
|
--^private Prints non controlled items.
|
|||
|
--^ignored Prints ignored items.
|
|||
|
--^hiddenchanged Prints hidden changed items. (Includes
|
|||
|
'--^changed')
|
|||
|
--^cloaked Prints cloaked items.
|
|||
|
--^controlledchanged This flag substitutes the following options:
|
|||
|
'--^added', '--^checkout', '--^copied',
|
|||
|
'--^replaced', '--^deleted', '--^moved'.
|
|||
|
--^all This flag replaces the following parameters:
|
|||
|
'--^controlledchanged', '--^changed',
|
|||
|
'--^localdeleted', '--^localmoved', '--^private'.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_WORKSPACESTATUS ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The '^status' command prints the loaded changeset on a workspace and gets
|
|||
|
the changed elements inside the workspace.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command can be used to show the pending changes in a workspace; the
|
|||
|
type of changes that can be searched can be modified by using the command
|
|||
|
parameters. By default, all changes are displayed, be they controlled
|
|||
|
or local.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The percent of similarity parameter '--^percentofsimilarity' (-^p) is used
|
|||
|
by the locally moved search to decide if two elements are the same item.
|
|||
|
The default value is 20% but it can be adjusted.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It is possible to show workspace changes grouped by client changelists.
|
|||
|
The '^default' changelist includes the changes that are not included in
|
|||
|
other changelists. That being said, the changes the default changelist
|
|||
|
will show depends on the search types flags specified.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Showing changes grouped by changelists requires showing controlled
|
|||
|
changes too (items with status equal to '^added', '^checkout', '^copied',
|
|||
|
'^replaced', '^deleted', or '^moved'). So, the '--^controlledchanged' option
|
|||
|
will be automatically enabled when changelists are shown.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The default encoding for XML output is utf-8.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
By default, this command will print current directory relative paths,
|
|||
|
unless the '--^machinereadable' or '--^short' flags are specified. If
|
|||
|
any of them are specified, the command will print absolute paths.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If '--^xml' flag is specified, workspace root relative paths will
|
|||
|
be printed (unless the '--^fp' flag is also specified, printing
|
|||
|
absolute paths instead).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status
|
|||
|
(Prints the working changeset and also all item types changed in the
|
|||
|
workspace, except the ignored ones.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^controlledchanged
|
|||
|
(Prints the working changeset and also the items that are checkedout, added,
|
|||
|
copied, replaced, deleted, and moved.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^added
|
|||
|
(Prints only the working changeset and the added items inside the workspace.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status c:\workspaceLocation\code\client --^added
|
|||
|
(Prints the working changeset and the added items under the specified path
|
|||
|
recursively.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^changelists
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^changelist
|
|||
|
(Shows all the workspace changes grouped by client changelists.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^changelist=pending_to_review
|
|||
|
(Shows the changes on the changelist named 'pending_to_review'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^changelist=default --^private
|
|||
|
(Shows the changes in the 'default' changelist, showing private items, along
|
|||
|
with items with controlled changes, if any.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^short --^changelist=pending_to_review | cm ^checkin -
|
|||
|
(Checkins the changes in the changelist 'pending_to_review'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status C:\workspaceLocation --^xml=output.xml
|
|||
|
(Gets the status information in XML format and using utf-8 in the file
|
|||
|
output.xml.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^ignored
|
|||
|
(Shows all ignored items.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^status --^ignored --^cutignored
|
|||
|
(Shows ignored files whose parent directory is not ignored and ignored
|
|||
|
directories but not their contents.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_XLINK ==
|
|||
|
Creates, edits, or displays details of an Xlink.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_XLINK ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink [-^w] [-^rs] <xlink_path> / (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec)>
|
|||
|
[<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
(Creates an Xlink.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink [-^rs] <xlink_path> /<relative_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
|
|||
|
[<expansion_rules>[ ...]]
|
|||
|
(Creates a readonly partial Xlink pointing to /<relative_path> instead of
|
|||
|
the default root / .)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^e <xlink_path> (<csetspec> | <lbspec> | <brspec>)
|
|||
|
(Edits an Xlink to change the target specification.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^s|--^show <xlink_path>
|
|||
|
(Shows the Xlink information including the expansion rules.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^ar|--^addrules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
|
|||
|
(Adds the given expansion rules to the Xlink.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^dr|--^deleterules <xlink_path> <expansion_rules>[ ...]
|
|||
|
(Removes the given expansion rules from the Xlink.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^e Edits an existing Xlink to change the target changeset
|
|||
|
specification.
|
|||
|
-^s | --^show Shows information about the selected Xlink.
|
|||
|
-^ar | --^addrules Adds one or more expansion rules to the selected Xlink.
|
|||
|
-^dr | --^deleterules Deletes one or more expansion rules from the selected
|
|||
|
Xlink.
|
|||
|
-^w Indicates that the Xlink is writable. This means that
|
|||
|
the contents of the target repository can be modified
|
|||
|
through branch autoexpansion.
|
|||
|
-^rs Relative server. This option allows creating a relative
|
|||
|
Xlink that is independent of the repository server. This
|
|||
|
way, Xlinks created in replicated repositories in
|
|||
|
different servers will be automatically identified.
|
|||
|
expansion_rules To specify one or more expansion rule. Each expansion
|
|||
|
rule is a pair branch-target branch:
|
|||
|
^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
|||
|
xlink_path This is the directory in the current workspace where
|
|||
|
the linked repository will be mounted (when creating an
|
|||
|
Xlink) or is mounted (when editing an Xlink).
|
|||
|
csetspec The full target changeset specification in the remote
|
|||
|
repository.
|
|||
|
This determines what version and branch is loaded in the
|
|||
|
workspace for the linked repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about changeset
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
lbspec The full label specification in the remote repository.
|
|||
|
(Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to learn more about label
|
|||
|
specs.)
|
|||
|
brspec The full branch specification in the remote repository.
|
|||
|
This uses the current changeset where the specified
|
|||
|
branch is pointing to. (Use 'cm ^help ^objectspec' to
|
|||
|
learn more about branch specs.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_XLINK ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command creates an Xlink to a given changeset. By default, a read-only
|
|||
|
Xlink is created. This means that the contents loaded in the workspace
|
|||
|
inside the Xlink cannot be modified. To be able to make changes in the
|
|||
|
Xlinked content, create a writable Xlink instead (using the '-^w' option).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
It is possible to use a simplified syntax of the command when editing the
|
|||
|
target changeset of an Xlink. This way, the only required parameter is the
|
|||
|
new target changeset. The rest of parameters of the Xlink will not be
|
|||
|
modified.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Branch auto-expansion:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
When a change is made in any writable-xlinked repositories ('-^w' option), a
|
|||
|
new branch needs to be created in the target repository. The name of the
|
|||
|
new branch is based on the checkout branch defined in the top-level
|
|||
|
repository. To determine the name of the branch to use, these rules apply:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
1) A check is made to see if a branch with the same full name exists
|
|||
|
in the target repository:
|
|||
|
- If it exists, this is used as the checkout branch.
|
|||
|
- If it does not exist, the branch name is built this way:
|
|||
|
- Name of the branch of the target Xlinked changeset + short name of
|
|||
|
the checkout branch (last part).
|
|||
|
- If this branch exists, it is used as the checkout branch.
|
|||
|
- Otherwise, the branch is created and the branch base is set to the
|
|||
|
Xlinked changeset.
|
|||
|
2) A new version of the Xlink is created in the branch on the parent
|
|||
|
repository pointing to the new changeset in the Xlinked repository.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Finally, the complete Xlink structure is kept up to date with the latest
|
|||
|
changes in the right versions.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink code\firstrepo / 1@first@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Creates an Xlink in folder 'firstrepo' in the current workspace where the
|
|||
|
changeset '1' in the repository 'first' will be mounted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink opengl\include /includes/opengl 1627@includes@localhost:8087
|
|||
|
(Creates a readonly partial Xlink in directory 'opengl\include' in the
|
|||
|
current workspace where the path '/includes/opengl' in changeset '1627' in
|
|||
|
the repository 'includes' will be mounted as root. It means that whatever
|
|||
|
is inside '/includes/opengl' will be mounted in 'opengl\include' while the
|
|||
|
rest of the repository will be ignored.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^w -^rs code\secondrepo / ^lb:LB001@second@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Creates a writable and relative Xlink in folder 'secondrepo' in the
|
|||
|
current workspace where the label 'LB001' in the repository 'second' will
|
|||
|
be mounted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink code\thirdrepo / 3@third@localhost:8087 ^br:/main-^br:/main/scm003
|
|||
|
(Creates an Xlink in folder 'thirdrepo' in the current workspace where the
|
|||
|
changeset '3' in the repository 'third' will be mounted.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^e code\secondrepo ^br:/main/task1234@second@localhost:8084
|
|||
|
(Edits the Xlink 'code\secondrepo' to change the target repository by
|
|||
|
linking the branch 'main/task1234' in the repository 'second'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink --^show code\thirdrepo
|
|||
|
(Shows information of the Xlink 'code\thirdrepo' including its expansion
|
|||
|
rules if exist).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^ar code\secondrepo ^br:/main-^br:/main/develop ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
|||
|
(Adds two expansion rules to the xlink 'code\secondrepo'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^xlink -^dr code\secondrepo ^br:/main/fix-^br:/main/develop/fix
|
|||
|
(Deletes the expansion rule from the xlink 'code\secondrepo').
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
|||
|
Allows to implement autocomplete suggestions in a line at the cursor position.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^autocomplete ^install
|
|||
|
(Installs 'cm' command completion in the shell.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^autocomplete ^uninstall
|
|||
|
(Uninstalls 'cm' command completion from the shell.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^autocomplete --^line <shell_line> --^position <cursor_position>
|
|||
|
(Returns autocomplete suggestions for 'shell_line' to be inserted at
|
|||
|
'cursor_position'.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
shell_line The line the user has written into the shell when the
|
|||
|
autocompletion was requested.
|
|||
|
In Bash, it is at the COMP_LINE environment variable.
|
|||
|
In PowerShell, it is at the $wordToComplete variable.
|
|||
|
cursor_position The position of the cursor when the autocompletion was
|
|||
|
requested.
|
|||
|
In Bash, it is at the COMP_POINT environment variable.
|
|||
|
In PowerShell, it is at the $cursorPosition variable.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_AUTOCOMPLETE ==
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
This command is not intended to be used by the final user,
|
|||
|
but it is documented in case it is needed to extend autocompletion
|
|||
|
support for the shell of choice.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^autocomplete --^line "cm ^show" --^position 7
|
|||
|
(Shows a list of commands starting with "show". In this case:
|
|||
|
showcommands, showfindobjects, showacl, showowner, showpermissions,
|
|||
|
showselector.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_API ==
|
|||
|
Starts a local HTTP server that listens for REST API requests.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_API ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^api [(-^p|--^port)=<portnumber>] [(-^r|--^remote)]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
-^p | --^port Tells the server to listen on port <portnumber>
|
|||
|
instead of 9090.
|
|||
|
-^r | --^remote Allows incoming remote connections. This means
|
|||
|
connections that come from other hosts instead of the
|
|||
|
local one.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_API ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The cm ^api command allows programmers to perform Unity VCS client operations
|
|||
|
in their machines.
|
|||
|
Read the Unity VCS API Guide for more information:
|
|||
|
https://www.plasticscm.com/documentation/restapi/plastic-scm-version-control-rest-api-guide
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
By default, the API listens for local connections only, on port 9090.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Press the Enter key to stop the server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^api
|
|||
|
(Starts the API listening on port 9090, local connections only.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^api -^r
|
|||
|
(Starts the API listening on port 9090, allowing any incoming connection.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^api --^port=15000 -^r
|
|||
|
(Starts the API listening on port 15000, allowing any incoming connection.)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
|||
|
Configures the Unity VCS client for the current machine user to work with a default server.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^configure [--^language=<language> --^workingmode=<mode> [AuthParameters]
|
|||
|
--^server=<server> [--^port=<port>]] [--^clientconf=<clientconfpath>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^language Available languages. See remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^workingmode Available users/security working modes. See remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
--^server Unity VCS server IP / address.
|
|||
|
--^port Unity VCS server port (optional for Cloud servers).
|
|||
|
--^clientconf File path used to create the configuration file (optional).
|
|||
|
AuthParameters Authentication parameters. See Remarks for more info.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_CONFIGURECLIENT ==
|
|||
|
Remarks:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
The cm ^configure command cannot be used on Cloud Edition or DVCS Edition of Unity VCS.
|
|||
|
Use 'plastic --configure' instead.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Languages:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- en (English)
|
|||
|
- es (Spanish)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Working modes:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- NameWorkingMode (Name)
|
|||
|
- NameIDWorkingMode (Name + ID)
|
|||
|
- LDAPWorkingMode (LDAP)
|
|||
|
- ADWorkingMode (Active Directory)
|
|||
|
- UPWorkingMode (User and password)
|
|||
|
- SSOWorkingMode (Single Sign On)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Client configuration:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
If this parameter is not specified, the default directory for
|
|||
|
'client.conf' file would be '%LocalAppData%\plastic4'
|
|||
|
on Windows or '$HOME/.plastic4' on linux/macOS.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
AuthParameters:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^LDAPWorkingMode and ^UPWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- --^user=<user>
|
|||
|
- --^password=<password>
|
|||
|
- ^SSOWorkingMode
|
|||
|
- --^user=<user>
|
|||
|
- --^token=<token>
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure
|
|||
|
(runs the interactive Unity VCS client configuration command)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^LDAPWorkingMode --^user=^jack --^password=^01234 \
|
|||
|
--^server=^plastic.mymachine.com --^port=^8084
|
|||
|
(configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
|
|||
|
configuration file in the default directory)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure --^language=^en --^workingmode=^NameWorkingMode --^server=^plastic.mymachine.com \
|
|||
|
--^port=^8084 --^clientconf=^clientconf_exp.conf
|
|||
|
(configures the Unity VCS client with the specified parameters and creates the 'client.conf'
|
|||
|
configuration file in the specified path)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure --^clientconf=c:/path/to/myclient.conf
|
|||
|
(Specified path will be used to create the client configuration file)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure --^clientconf=myclient.conf
|
|||
|
(File myclient.conf inside default config directory will be used)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^configure --^clientconf=c:/exisitingDirectory
|
|||
|
(Default filename, client.conf, in specified directory will be used)
|
|||
|
configuration file in the specified path)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to inspect, register and execute repository purges. Purged revisions are no longer accessible for that repository, thus helping to free space.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Warning: Purge actions are irreversible. Once they are executed, you will not be able to load purged revisions anymore—either by switching a workspace or when showing branch or changeset differences. Use this under your own responsibility.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge <command> [options]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Commands:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
- ^register
|
|||
|
- ^execute
|
|||
|
- ^show
|
|||
|
- ^history
|
|||
|
- ^unregister
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
To get more information about each command run:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge <command> --^usage
|
|||
|
cm ^purge <command> --^help
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM" --^repository=timemachine
|
|||
|
(registers a purge action for the 'timemachine' repository)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history
|
|||
|
(lists the ID and status of all the purge actions ever registerd in the server)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^show 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817 --^verbose
|
|||
|
(shows in detail the purge action metadata for a given ID,
|
|||
|
including items and revisions affected by the purge)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^execute 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
|
|||
|
(starts a previously registered purge action)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
|
|||
|
(purges that were not executed can be deleted from the registry)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_REGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Computes and registers a purge action.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
File revisions older than the selected date(s) would be considered for purging and, as a rule, we will keep at least a revision in every branch head and labeled revisions. You can use the "cm ^purge ^show" command to check the selected revisions prior to run it with the "cm ^purge ^execute" command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE_REGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register (<extension> <before_date>)... [--^repository=<rep_spec>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^repository Repository where the purge is intended to be applied.
|
|||
|
It is not necessary within a workspace path but to pick a different one.
|
|||
|
extension Extension of the file type to be purged. Note that revisions of renamed
|
|||
|
items will also be considered for its removal.
|
|||
|
before_date Only revisions older than this date will be considered for its removal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE_REGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM"
|
|||
|
(registers a purge action over revisions of Matroska files created before a certain date)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "6:00 AM"
|
|||
|
(you can specify just the date or just the time)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "6:00Z"
|
|||
|
(you can specify the time in UTC instead of local time)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^register ".mkv" "1955-Nov-05 6:00 AM" --^repository=timemachine
|
|||
|
(you can specify a different repository to register the purge)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
|
|||
|
Executes a purge action previously registered.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Warning: Purge actions are irreversible. Once they are executed, you will not be able to load purged revisions anymore—either by switching a workspace or when showing branch or changeset differences. Use this under your own responsibility.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Please ensure you check the file history to confirm which revisions/changesets are not relevant. Do not hesitate to use the cm ^purge ^show command prior to the purge execution in order to verify no unexpected revision is selected for its removal.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^execute <purge_guid> [--^server=<server>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
|
|||
|
will be executed.
|
|||
|
purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE_EXECUTE ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^execute be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13
|
|||
|
(Executes a purge given its ID).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^execute be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^server=myorg@cloud
|
|||
|
(You can specify a precise server if you need it).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_SHOW ==
|
|||
|
Provides a report of the purge status and contents.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE_SHOW ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^show <purge_guid> [--^verbose | --^server=<server>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
|
|||
|
will be queried.
|
|||
|
--^verbose Extends the report to include the items and revisions
|
|||
|
involved in the purge.
|
|||
|
purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE_SHOW ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13
|
|||
|
(Provides a brief report of the purge status)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^verbose
|
|||
|
(Provides additional information per purged extension,
|
|||
|
including items and revisions)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^show be5b9145-1bd9-4c43-bd90-f2ff727bbf13 --^server=myorg@cloud
|
|||
|
(You can specify a different server if you wish)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Allows the user to check the state of all the purges registed in the server at some point.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Also, it is useful to get information about them that are preserved for query purposes, such as the author, the date of execution or the storage size and the types affected by the purge.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history [--^verbose | --^server=<server>]
|
|||
|
[--^sort=(^desc|^asc)]
|
|||
|
[--^skip=<skip> | --^limit=<limit>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
|
|||
|
will be queried.
|
|||
|
--^verbose By default, only the ID and the status is shown per
|
|||
|
purge. This option includes more detailed information.
|
|||
|
--^sort Specifies an ordering for purges shown in the result.
|
|||
|
It can be descending (^desc) or ascending (^asc).
|
|||
|
--^skip Specifies a number of entries to skip so they are not
|
|||
|
reflected in the result.
|
|||
|
--^limit Specifies the maximum number of entries to show at once.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE_HISTORY ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history
|
|||
|
(Shows the ID and status for all purges ever registered in the server).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^server=stoltz@cloud
|
|||
|
(You can override the server to use different one if needed).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^verbose
|
|||
|
(Includes more detailed data associated to the shown purges).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^sort=^asc
|
|||
|
(Shows the history starting from the oldest purges).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^skip=0 --^limit=20
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^skip=20 --^limit=20
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^history --^skip=40 --^limit=20
|
|||
|
(Instead of showing everything at once, you can paginate results).
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_DESCRIPTION_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Purge actions can be deleted from the registry if you decide to not run them.
|
|||
|
Remember that it is not possible to unregister purges that were already executed.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_USAGE_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Usage:
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^unregister <purge_guid> [--^server=<server>]
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
Options:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
--^server Allows to specify the server where purge actions
|
|||
|
will be queried.
|
|||
|
purge_guid The GUID returned by the "cm ^purge ^register" command.
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
== CMD_HELP_PURGE_UNREGISTER ==
|
|||
|
Examples:
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817
|
|||
|
(purges that were not executed can be deleted from the registry)
|
|||
|
|
|||
|
cm ^purge ^unregister 545ec81b-23ea-462c-91f4-d7c62a6e8817 --^server=myorg@cloud
|
|||
|
(you can specify a different server to unregister the purge)
|